Quarterlytics / Financial Services / TP ICAP Group

TP ICAP Group

tcap · LSE Financial Services
Claim this profile
Ticker tcap
Exchange LSE
Sector Financial Services
Industry
Employees 5001-10,000
← All annual reports
FY2014 Annual Report · TP ICAP Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
T

u

l

l

e

t

t

P

r

e

b

o

n

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

1

4

Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
Tullett Prebon is one of the world’s largest interdealer brokers, and acts 
as an intermediary in the world’s major wholesale over-the-counter 
and exchange traded financial and commodity markets, facilitating 
the trading activities of its clients, in particular commercial and 
investment banks.
The business covers five major product groups: Fixed Income Securities and their derivatives; Interest Rate 
Derivatives, Treasury Products, Equities and Energy. The business brokers the products on a Name Passing basis 
(where all counterparties to a transaction settle directly with each other), a Matched Principal basis (where the 
business is counterparty to both sides of a matching trade), or an Executing Broker basis (where the business 
executes transactions on certain regulated exchanges in accordance with client orders and then ‘gives-up’ the 
trade to the client). Tullett Prebon does not take any proprietary positions.

Tullett Prebon operates a hybrid voice broking business, where brokers, supported by proprietary screens 
displaying≈historical data, analytics and real-time prices, discover price and liquidity for their clients; and 
through electronic platforms, which complement and support the voice broking capability.

Tullett Prebon also has an established information sales business, Tullett Prebon Information, which collects, 
cleanses, collates and distributes real-time information to data providers, and a Risk Management Services 
business, which provides clients with post-trade, multi-product matching services.

Tullett Prebon’s electronic platforms

Contents

Hybrid platforms
tpAGENCY – Rates

tpCADDEAL – Canadian Bonds

tpCREDITDEAL – Credit

tpENERGYTRADE – Energy

tpFORWARD DEAL – FX

tpIRODEAL – Rates

tpSPOTDEAL – Spot FX

tpSWAPDEAL – Rates

tpTRADEBLADE FXO – FXO

Post-trade risk management services 
tpMATCH – Rates 
tpMATCH BASIS – Rates 
tpMATCH NDF – Treasury

Pure electronic platforms
tpQUICKDEAL – Auctions

tpREPO – Rates

2 

 Chief Executive’s 
Review

Strategic Report
4 
5 

  Chairman’s Statement

 Objectives, Strategy, Business 
Model and Risk Profile 
 Main Trends and Factors 
likely to affect the Company

6 

  Overview

8 
10    Operating Review
12    Litigation
12    Regulatory Matters
12    Financial Review
16    Risk Management
 Corporate Social 
21   
Responsibility

Governance
24    Board of Directors
25    Directors’ Report
28    Corporate Governance Report
35   

 Report on Directors’ 
Remuneration
 Statement of Directors’ 
Responsibilities

49   

Financial Statements
Group
50  

 Independent Auditor’s Report 
to the Members of Tullett 
Prebon plc
 Consolidated Income 
Statement
 Consolidated Statement of  
Comprehensive Income
 Consolidated Balance Sheet
 Consolidated Statement of 
Changes in Equity
 Consolidated Cash Flow 
Statement
 Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements

55   

56   

57   
58   

59   

60   

Company 
104   Company Balance Sheet
105    Notes to the Financial 

Statements

Shareholder Information
109   Shareholder Information

This Annual Report has been prepared for, and only for, the members of the Company as a body, and no other persons. The Company, its Directors, employees, 
agents or advisers do not accept or assume responsibility to any other person to whom this document is shown or into whose hands it may come and such 
responsibility is expressly disclaimed. By their nature, the statements concerning the risks and uncertainties facing the Group in this Annual Report involve 
uncertainty since future events and circumstances can cause results and developments to differ materially from those anticipated. The forward-looking 
statements reflect knowledge and information available at the date of preparation of this Annual Report and the Company undertakes no obligation to 
update these forward-looking statements. Nothing in this Annual Report should be construed as a profit forecast.

 
 
 
Financial highlights

Underlying, before exceptional and acquisition related items (including PVM since acquisition on 26 November 2014) 

Revenue
£703.5m
(2013: £803.7m)

Profit before tax
£86.6m
(2013: £99.6m) 

Operating profit
£100.7m
(2013: £115.4m) 

Basic EPS 
32.3p
(2013: 36.0p)

Operating margin
14.3%
(2013: 14.4%) 

Reported, after exceptional and acquisition related items (including PVM since acquisition)

Profit before tax
£33.5m 
(2013: £84.4m) 

Basic EPS 
11.2p
(2013: 30.1p) 

Dividend per share 
16.85p
(2013: 16.85p)

A table showing Underlying and Reported figures for each year, detailing the exceptional and acquisition related items,  
is included in the Financial Review on pages 12 to 16.

Tullett Prebon’s global presence

24 

countries

Overview

2,600 

brokers and staff

29 

locations

S
t
r
a
t
e
g

i
c
R
e
p
o
r
t

G
o
v
e
r
n
a
n
c
e

F
i
n
a
n
c
i
a

l
S
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

S
h
a
r
e
h
o
d
e
r

l

I

n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n

Americas:
New York
Jersey City
Hoboken
Houston
Toronto
São Paulo
Mexico City

EMEA: 
London
Paris
Frankfurt 
Madrid
Zurich
Luxembourg
Warsaw
Geneva
Dubai
Manama
Johannesburg
Vienna

Asia Pacific:
Singapore 
Hong Kong
Tokyo
Shanghai
Seoul
Mumbai
Jakarta
Bangkok
Manila
Sydney

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |    1

 
 
 
Chief Executive’s Review

I am delighted to have joined Tullett Prebon as Chief Executive 
in September 2014 and I would like to thank everyone for their 
warm welcome.

where we hold leading market positions, the project will help 
us define a road map where there is significant upside 
potential for us and our clients. 

This is a strong, resilient company that is highly regarded by its 
clients, has a loyal, long-serving employee base and is placed 
firmly at the heart of the global financial services industry. 

A great amount was achieved in 2014:

•  The acquisition of PVM, a leading global energy broker, 
which propels our pro forma energy revenues to 22% of 
the Group total;

•  Hiring 40 fixed income brokers in the US from Murphy & 
Durieu, takes our broker headcount in the Americas to 
nearly 550 people;

•  We reached a favourable settlement of all litigation 

between ourselves and BGC;

•  We launched our new culture and conduct agenda – “time 

for change”;

•  We are finalising a global strategic review; and
•  We maintained our disciplined focus on costs and acted 

quickly and decisively to align our cost base to our revenues.

Financial performance and sector conditions
Conditions were again challenging for the global brokerage 
sector and our revenues fell £100m to £704m. Global markets 
participants continue to adapt to tighter capital controls and 
regulation which has a direct bearing on trading volumes. 
We maintained the underlying operating margin above 14% 
reflecting the positive impact of our cost improvement 
programme which has reduced annual fixed costs by over 
£45m, and we will continue to see the benefits of this flow 
through in 2015. 

Towards the end of 2014 we saw an uptick in volatility in 
some markets as a result of concerns about global economic 
growth and political turbulence in many parts of the world. 
The price of crude oil fell sharply, taking almost everybody 
by surprise.

In these conditions our brokers’ depth of knowledge and 
experience proved invaluable to achieve clients’ desired 
outcomes. As a result, we saw evidence of an upturn in 
business activity in the latter part of 2014.

Our Information Sales business, Tullett Prebon Information, 
continues to be a market leading supplier of over-the-counter 
(‘OTC’) data and we expanded the content portfolio in 2014. This 
business is benefiting from demand, driven in part by compliance 
and regulatory requirements, for high quality, reliable and 
independent information on the global OTC markets. We have 
also continued to invest in our hybrid e-Broking platforms which 
connect clients and brokers to live markets. 

Strategic review
In the light of the decline in revenues in recent years, 
one of my first actions after joining Tullett Prebon was to 
commence a global strategy review to evaluate our position 
and prospects in each of our products and markets around 
the world.

The exercise is reaffirming the strength and resilience of 
our global business lines, each of which is being evaluated 
for existing and forecast fee pools, competitive landscape, the 
outlook for margins, the outlook for regulation, the threat and 
opportunity of technology and the regional attractiveness. 
In addition to highlighting those of our products and services 

2    |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

As part of our strategy review, we surveyed all our employees 
to seek their opinions and I am pleased to say that more than 
75% responded. 90% of our staff who responded said they are 
proud to work at Tullett Prebon and the exercise underlined 
the enormous knowledge, talent, pride and commitment that 
exists in our workforce. 

We have also sought the views of our clients. Their responses 
show how highly they value our depth of market knowledge, 
the strength and breadth of our networks and the quality 
services that they receive from us. 

This global strategy review is currently being finalised, and 
the conclusions will be communicated to shareholders in 
due course. When the exercise is concluded we will have 
developed plans to optimise our core franchises, and identified 
opportunities to invest in products and services that offer 
long term value incorporating technology that best suits client 
needs. Our commitment to our capital markets customer base 
will remain undiminished while we will look to continue to 
add new streams of revenue from additional sources.

The barriers to entry into this sector have risen with the cost of 
IT infrastructure investment and the rising cost of regulation. In 
Europe, MiFiD II represents another investment challenge, while 
the US has also introduced far reaching protocols that affect the 
cost of doing business. Long awaited market consolidation is 
underway. This represents an opportunity for the larger global 
players as the smaller market participants will struggle to bear 
these investment costs. We will remain vigilant regarding the 
acquisition of value creating assets and we will continue to 
evaluate interesting opportunities as they arise. 

Acquisitions
In November we closed the acquisition of PVM, a leading 
energy brokerage firm which brings 33 new product desks and 
129 new specialist brokers. This is an exciting development for 
Tullett Prebon and is consistent with our strategy of 
expanding in the energy sector. 

PVM’s main activities are in crude oil and petroleum products, 
and the business is particularly strong in London. It has an 
average daily turnover of more than 150 million barrels of OTC 
oil derivatives. It also participates in the biomass and biofuels 
sectors, and has started the physical and financial broking of 
coal and the physical options broking of EU Carbon allowances 
and offsets. It adds Singapore distillates, Urals and energy-
related shipping to the Tullett Prebon Group.

PVM’s client base diversifies that of Tullett Prebon and 
includes commodity producers and consumers, traders and 
risk managers within large oil and gas corporations, energy 
utilities, fund managers, professional traders and hedge funds. 

PVM also brings to the Group its energy data set which will 
enable our information business to extend and deepen its 
global crude, refined and middle distillates coverage. 

In early 2015, we enhanced our US brokerage activities with 
the addition of 40 new fixed income brokers from Murphy & 
Durieu L.P. They bring expertise and access to deep liquidity 
pools in a diverse range of fixed income products including 
corporates, convertible, municipal, high yield, distressed and 
government securities. Our total number of front office 
employees in the Americas is now almost 550 having re-
established critical mass in the region.

S
t
r
a
t
e
g

i
c
R
e
p
o
r
t

Our Swap Execution Facility (tpSEF)
During 2014, tpSEF continued to provide execution services 
globally for swaps clients across the five major assets classes: 
rates, credit, equities, FX, and commodities. tpSEF has provided 
Tullett Prebon’s customers with a seamless transition from 
voice broking to trading swaps on a regulated venue, enabling 
us to maintain our long-established status as a leader in swaps 
liquidity and in the execution of swaps transactions.

It is tpSEF’s intention to apply for registration as a security-
based SEF when final rules on those instruments are published 
by the SEC which is currently expected in 2015. 

Awards and recognition from our clients
As in previous years, in 2014 we won plaudits from our clients 
and the industry. These are testament to our excellence of 
products, services and execution capabilities. 

For the fifth consecutive year Tullett Prebon was voted 
number one in more product categories than any other 
interdealer broker in Risk Magazine’s 2014 annual 
interdealer rankings. We also won:

•  Overall Currency IDB of the Year, 2014 Risk Magazine’s 

annual interdealer rankings;

•  Commodities Broker of the Year and Innovator of the Year at 

the 2014 Global Derivatives Awards;

•  Commodity Broker of the Year, Futures and Options 

Awards 2014;

•  Best Broker for Forward FX, 2014 FX Week Best Banks 

Awards; and

•  Best Data Provider (Broker), Inside Market Data Awards for 

the 4th consecutive year. 

New hires
I am delighted to have made some key new appointments in 
2014. Philip Price joins as our new Group Chief Legal Counsel 
and Global Head of Compliance. Carrie Heiss joins as Group 
Global Head of Human Resources. Stephen Breslin is our new 
Group Head of Communications. All of these individuals bring 
a wealth of experience from previous appointments and all 
are committed to our agenda for conduct and culture as part 
of their roles. 

Conduct, culture and regulation
Regulators around the world have placed the whole of the 
financial services industry under heavy scrutiny following the 
financial crisis and we fully support their desire to inculcate 
the industry with a stronger culture.

At Tullett Prebon, we have recognised that how we conduct 
ourselves as individuals and as a firm is as important as 
the products and services we deliver. Our commitment to 
instilling the highest standards of conduct at Tullett Prebon 
culminated in the launch of our new framework “Our Culture, 
Time for Change” in December 2014. It was devised following 
numerous discussions with our employees, Executive 
Committee members and the Board, and we challenged 
ourselves and our assumptions again and again during a 
rigorous and intense process. 

The resulting cultural framework has three pillars: our values, 
our principles, and our behaviours, which are the practical, 
day-to-day manifestation of our culture. 

Our values are simple and central to everything we do: 
Honesty, Integrity, Respect and Excellence.

Our principles are:

•  To act as a good intermediary – we act honestly, fairly and 

professionally in serving our clients;

•  Clean pricing – we always communicate prices and market 

data based on levels that reflect market supply and demand, 
market liquidity and risk;

•  Appropriate disclosure of information – we always uphold 
client confidentiality and do not provide misleading or 
false information;

•  Financial crime – we ensure that our services are not used 
to facilitate financial crime and we report all suspicious 
transactions and activities to the relevant authorities; and

•  Quality of market infrastructure – we provide resilient 

infrastructure to meet our client and market obligations. 
We invest in new technologies to innovate and protect 
against threats such as cyber crime.

We are embedding these principles and behaviours of our 
culture, and the monitoring of them, in all our systems and 
processes. We have issued a new Enterprise Risk Management 
Framework and toolset which is directly linked to our culture 
and how we execute business. We are introducing new HR 
policies and processes to ensure that our culture and values 
underpin everything we ask of our employees. 

There will always be some risk in our industry, but we are 
committed to building an outstanding culture throughout our 
Group and in 2015 we will more closely link compensation for 
our senior management to the firm’s overall conduct scorecard. 

Conclusion of legal actions in the US
In January 2015 the action taken by Tullett Prebon against 
BGC in the New Jersey Superior Court, in response to the raid 
of Tullett Prebon brokers by BGC in 2009 came to a favourable 
conclusion, as we entered into a settlement agreement with 
BGC under which BGC will pay $100m to the Company. We 
have a duty to our shareholders to seek to protect our legal 
rights and interests and although legal action can be 
uncertain, protracted and expensive, it was appropriate to 
take action in order to do so.

The year ahead
Looking ahead to 2015, I see many areas of exciting potential 
for Tullett Prebon. We will be outward looking, we will embrace 
technology and we are optimistic. We have a solid platform 
from which to push ahead with changes in the business that 
will give us the potential to deliver sustainable growth. 

I have been enormously encouraged by the positive 
engagement from colleagues across the Group, at all levels, 
who have embraced change and demonstrated extraordinary 
commitment to our customers and to Tullett Prebon. Our 
business achievements are down to them. I am grateful for 
their skill and dedication and I would like to thank them all 
for their contribution. 

John Phizackerley
Chief Executive
3 March 2015

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |    3

GovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
Strategic Report

Chairman’s Statement

I am pleased to report that during 2014 we have taken further 
steps to strengthen the Company to position it to succeed in 
colouring its objective to create shareholder value.

Market conditions remained challenging throughout 2014 as 
the overall level of activity in the financial markets remained 
subdued, although there was some pick-up in activity in some 
products and markets in the second half of the year.

In the light of the continuation of difficult market conditions 
a number of actions were taken during the year to further reduce 
headcount and other fixed costs in order to maintain flexibility 
in costs and to better align the cost base with the lower level 
of revenue. The benefit of this cost improvement programme, 
together with the continued benefit from cost management 
actions taken in previous years, is reflected in the maintenance 
of the underlying operating margin at 14.3%, compared with 
14.4% in the previous year, despite the reduction in revenue.

The Company entered into an agreement with BGC in 
January 2015 under which BGC will pay $100m to the 
Company to settle the litigation in the New Jersey Superior 
Court. It is pleasing to note that, following this agreement, the 
group is not now involved in any significant legal proceedings. 
The Company has a duty to shareholders to seek to protect its 
legal rights and interests, and we will not hesitate to initiate 
proceedings should any party seek to breach them and 
damage our business.

The Board is recommending an unchanged final dividend 
of 11.25p per share, making the total dividend for the year 
16.85p per share (2013: 16.85p per share). The final dividend 
will be payable on 14 May 2015 to shareholders on the register 
at close of business on 24 April 2015.

The Board has considered whether the settlement money 
from BGC should be returned to shareholders or retained to 
fund business developments, including acquisitions. In the 
light of the opportunities to invest in products and services to 
facilitate our clients’ strategies that would further strengthen 
our business and earn an attractive return on capital, the 
Board has decided that the funds should be retained for 
those purposes. The Board does not have any intention 
to hold capital in excess of the Company’s regulatory 
and business development requirements.

Board and Governance
I was delighted to welcome John Phizackerley as Tullett Prebon’s 
new Chief Executive from the beginning of September 2014 
to replace Terry Smith. John Phizackerley, known as Phiz, has a 
distinguished track record in the investment banking industry 
and wide international experience. His deep understanding 
of our customers’ needs and his regulatory expertise will be 
invaluable in taking Tullett Prebon forward in these changing 
times to the next stage in its development.

The Board is immensely grateful to Terry Smith for his huge 
contribution to the business which he served as Chief Executive 
for over ten years. Terry Smith had the vision to bring together 
Tullett Liberty and Prebon Yamane to create what is today one 
of the leading interdealer brokers in the world. He steered the 
Group through the financial and regulatory upheavals of the 
last few years, and created significant value for shareholders. 
We all wish him well for the future.

4    |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

The Board spent a considerable amount of time during 2014 
reviewing its risk management governance arrangements and 
its risk management framework. One of the conclusions from 
the review is that the Board should appoint a new Non-executive 
Director with extensive experience in risk management who 
would chair a new Risk Committee of the Board, and in addition 
act as the Non-executive Chairman of the business’s UK 
regulated entities and their risk committees. The Company’s risk 
management governance arrangements are described in detail 
later in the Strategic Report.

We have continued to actively engage with shareholders 
during 2014, and I believe that we have established a useful 
and constructive dialogue to ensure that the Board stays 
abreast of the development of shareholder views on 
governance, remuneration, and other key issues.

Strategy
One of John Phizackerley’s first actions was to conduct a 
strategy review to evaluate our position and prospects in each 
of our products and markets around the world. This in-depth 
strategy review exercise will culminate shortly, and the results 
will then be reported to shareholders.

Outlook
Tullett Prebon has produced a robust set of results reflecting 
a strong operational performance in what was another 
challenging year for the interdealer brokerage sector. Due 
to ongoing cost discipline we have maintained our margins. 
Looking forward, we will continue to add products and 
services to facilitate our clients’ strategies, incorporating 
content and technologies that add value. Our focus on 
conduct and culture emphasises our ongoing commitment to 
play a central role in global financial markets and to be viewed 
as a trusted partner. We will continue to look to make strides 
to exploit the opportunities in a consolidating marketplace.

The benefits from the acquisition of PVM and the arrival of 
brokers from Murphy & Durieu will flow through in 2015. PVM 
significantly increases the scale of the Group’s activities in the 
energy sector, and diversifies the Group’s client base, reducing 
our dependence on wholesale investment and commercial 
banks. We will continue to expand the data content for our 
high margin, growing, Information Sales business through the 
oil price data generated from the PVM business, and through 
other exclusive data content deals. 

It remains difficult, however, to predict accurately the level 
of activity in the markets we serve. Revenue in the first two 
months of 2015, excluding PVM, and at constant exchange 
rates, is unchanged compared with the equivalent period last 
year. We will continue to show discipline on costs. The benefit 
of the actions we have taken through the cost improvement 
programme in 2014 will continue to flow through in 2015, 
particularly in the first half.

Rupert Robson
Chairman
3 March 2015

Objectives, strategy, business model 
and risk profile

Corporate objective
The corporate objective is to maximise returns to shareholders 
over the medium to long term with an acceptable level of risk. 

Strategy
The Company has commenced a global strategic review to 
evaluate the business’s position and prospects in each of its 
products and markets around the world. This review, which 
is currently being finalised, is discussed in more detail in the 
Chief Executive’s Review on pages 2 and 3. The conclusions 
will be communicated to shareholders in due course.

The Group’s strategy is to continue to develop its business, 
operating as an intermediary in the world’s major wholesale 
OTC and exchange traded financial and commodity markets, 
with the scale and breadth to deliver superior performance 
and returns, underpinned by strong financial management 
disciplines, and without actively taking credit and market risk.

The business objectives to deliver the strategy are:

•  To provide a high quality broking service to clients, 

facilitating their trading activity through developing and 
maintaining strong pools of liquidity across all major asset 
classes and all major financial centres. The key actions to 
meet this objective include:

 – attracting and retaining broking expertise and client 

relationships;

 – providing clients with a variety of execution methods 

consistent with market demand and evolving regulatory 
requirements; and

 – maintaining the business’s reputation for trustworthiness 

and integrity in the financial markets.

•  To develop revenue streams from non-broking services 

related to financial and commodity markets. The key actions 
to meet this objective include:

 – developing the Group’s Information Sales business 

through extension of its product offering and expansion 
of its customer base; and

 – identifying potential opportunities to acquire or develop 

other value added non-broking services capable of 
generating an adequate financial return.

•  To deliver superior and consistent operating margins 
and return on capital. The key actions to achieve this 
objective include:

 – maintaining cost discipline and flexibility in the cost base;

 – maintaining a prudent financial structure; and

 – operating an effective risk management governance 

structure and risk management framework so that the 
Group can manage its risks within its risk appetite.

Business model and risk profile
The Company’s business model is based on generating a 
return from providing a facilitation service to clients, enabling 
them to trade efficiently and effectively. This service can be 
provided without actively taking credit and market risk.

In accordance with the risk appetite set by the Board, 
the Group does not actively seek risk in order to generate 
a return but is willing to accept a limited amount of risk as a 
consequence of its broking activities, principally counterparty 
credit risk and operational risk. This is reflected in the business 
model adopted by the Group whereby it acts only as an 
intermediary in the financial markets. The Group’s risk 
management policies explicitly prohibit any active taking of 
trading risk and the Group does not trade for its own account. 
However, whilst the Group does not actively seek to assume 
risk as part of its business model, the Group is exposed to 
certain risks as a consequence of its broking activity, primarily 
to counterparty credit risk and operational risk, and also to a 
limited amount of market risk.

The broking business of the Group is conducted through 
three distinct models: the Name Passing model (also known 
as Name Give-Up); the Matched Principal model; and the 
Executing Broker model.

Around 75% of the Group’s broking revenue (on a pro forma 
basis including PVM) is derived from Name Passing activities, 
where the Group is not a counterparty to the trade, and where 
its exposure to a client is limited to outstanding invoices for 
commission. The level of invoiced receivables is monitored 
closely, by individual client and in aggregate, and there have 
been very few instances in the past few years when invoiced 
receivables have not been collected.

Around 20% of the Group’s broking revenue is derived 
from Matched Principal activities, where the Group is 
the counterparty to both sides of a matching trade and 
consequently bears counterparty credit risk during the period 
between execution and settlement of the trade. Once a 
Matched Principal transaction has settled (usually 1-3 days 
after trade date), there is no ongoing risk for the business. To 
mitigate settlement risk the Group’s risk management policies 
require that transactions are undertaken on a strict delivery 
versus payment basis. In the event that a client defaults prior 
to settlement in a Matched Principal trade, the Group’s 
exposure is not to the principal amount but to the movement 
in the market value of the underlying instrument, and so the 
Group’s exposure becomes a market risk. This risk is mitigated 
by the use of central counterparty services and other default 
risk transfer agreements, where appropriate, and by taking 
swift action to close out any position that arises as a result of 
a client default. In addition to credit risk, the Group’s Matched 
Principal activity also gives rise to limited market risk as a 
result of the infrequent residual balances which result from 
the Group’s failure to match clients’ orders precisely or 
through broker error.

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |    5

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationStrategic Report continued

Around 5% of the Group’s broking revenue is derived 
from the business operating as an Executing Broker, under 
an International Uniform Brokerage Execution Give-up 
agreement (or equivalent), whereby the Group executes 
transactions on certain regulated exchanges as per client 
orders, and then ‘gives-up’ the trade to the relevant client 
(or its clearing member). The Group is exposed to short term 
pre-settlement risk during the period between the execution 
of the trade and the client claiming the trade. This exposure is 
minimal, as under the terms of the ‘give-up’ agreements the 
Group has in place with its clients, trades must be claimed by 
the end of the trade day. Once the trade has been claimed, 
the Group’s only exposure to the client is for the invoiced 
commission receivable.

The Group’s broking activity gives rise to various operational 
risks. These include the risk of business disruption, employee 
error and the failure of a business process or IT system, as well 
as the risk of litigation being brought against the Group.

The level of the Group’s revenue is substantially dependent 
on customer trading volumes. The volumes of transactions 
the Group’s customers conduct with it are affected by their 
reaction to the actions being taken by regulators affecting 
their willingness and ability to trade.

The impact of new regulations directly affecting OTC 
derivatives markets and the costs of complying with 
new regulations
Part of the regulatory reforms being introduced relates directly 
to the operation of OTC derivatives markets, which are the most 
important markets for the Group. The regulatory reforms of the 
OTC derivatives markets are being effected in the United States 
through the implementation by the Commodity Futures Trading 
Commission (‘CFTC’) and the Securities Exchange Commission 
(‘SEC’) of the provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act, and in Europe 
through the European Markets Infrastructure Regulation 
(‘EMIR’) and the review of the Markets in Financial Instruments 
Directive (‘MiFID’). There are four broad themes to the reforms:

Discussion on the Group’s Enterprise Risk Management 
Framework, and further information on the Group’s Principal 
Risks is included on pages 16 to 21.

•  the requirement that certain derivatives contracts be 

cleared through central counterparties (with exemptions 
for some non-financial market participants);

•  the requirement for trades to be reported to trade repositories;

•  enhanced pre and post trade transparency; and

•  the requirement that trades in derivatives contracts which 
are required to be cleared are executed through regulated 
execution venues (the Swap Execution Facility (‘SEF’) in the 
United States, and the Organised Trading Facility (‘OTF’) 
in Europe).

The Company’s swap execution facility, tpSEF Inc. (‘tpSEF’) 
started operating in October 2013 under its temporary 
registration from the CFTC. tpSEF provides swap execution 
services across the five major asset classes utilising many 
of the Group’s electronic broking platforms to satisfy the 
regulatory requirements relating to trade execution, 
trade reporting, audit trail, and submission to clearing for 
instruments required to be cleared. tpSEF offers execution 
services for both Required Transactions (certain interest rate 
and credit index instruments subject since February 2014 to 
the CFTC’s mandatory clearing requirement and the “made 
available to trade” determination) and Permitted Transactions 
(all other instruments within the scope of the legislation). 
Third party analysis of the notional volume of trades reported 
through SEFs shows that the total volumes, including the 
dealer-to-client segment, have increased during 2014 and that 
the volumes in the dealer-to-dealer segment, and the market 
shares of the interdealer brokers within that segment, have 
been largely maintained. 

Main trends and factors likely to 
affect the future development, 
performance and position of 
the Company’s business

The level of financial market volatility
The Group generates revenue from commissions it earns by 
facilitating and executing customer orders. The level of revenue 
is substantially dependent on customer trading volumes. The 
volumes of transactions the Group’s customers’ conduct with it 
are affected by the level of volatility in financial markets and by 
their risk appetite. Volatility is one of the key drivers of activity 
in the financial markets. During periods of market turbulence 
the level of volatility tends to be high and the business benefits 
from the increased volumes that occur during such periods. 
Levels of activity in the financial markets can reduce sharply, 
however, when high volatility is overshadowed by structural 
uncertainty, resulting in a reduction in risk appetite amongst 
clients. During periods of low volatility the level of financial 
market activity is generally lower, and the volume of 
transactions undertaken by the business on behalf of 
its clients tends to be lower. 

The impact of the changing regulatory environment 
for the Group’s customers
In response to the financial crisis following the collapse of 
Lehman Brothers in 2008, regulators worldwide have been 
adopting an increased level of scrutiny in supervising the 
financial markets and have been generally tightening the 
capital, leverage and liquidity requirements of commercial 
and investment banks, and taking steps to limit or separate 
their activities in order to reduce risk.

6    |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

In Europe, the implementation of EMIR, which contains 
provisions governing mandatory clearing requirements and 
trade reporting requirements for derivatives, is coming into 
effect in stages as the various technical standards are agreed. 
The requirements that details of derivative contracts must 
be reported to recognised trade repositories came into 
effect from 12 February 2014, the first clearing obligations 
are expected to come into effect during 2015, subject to the 
authorisation of a relevant CCP, and margin requirements 
for non-cleared trades will apply from 1 December 2015. The 
legislative framework governing permissible trade execution 
venues, and governance and conduct of business requirements 
for trading venues, (MiFID II) and a new regulation (MiFIR), has 
been adopted by the EU Council and European Parliament, and 
the rules set out in MiFID II will become effective at the 
beginning of 2017.

The introduction of the reforms in both the US and Europe 
has caused considerable uncertainty amongst the Group’s 
customers, which can persist in the period after the date at 
which the various requirements have come into force, about 
which counterparties and which transactions may be covered 
by the reforms and about the actions necessary to ensure 
compliance, which has affected, and may continue to affect, 
the volumes of transactions the Group’s customers conduct 
with it.

The reforms reinforce the role of the intermediary in the OTC 
markets, and the introduction of more electronic platforms into 
these markets represents an evolution of the facilitation service 
that the Group provides, rather than fundamentally changing 
the way in which OTC markets operate, but the reforms do 
introduce new rules for intermediaries and changes in the way 
in which trading is undertaken by participants in these markets. 
The reforms are therefore likely to have an effect on the Group’s 
business and the revenue the business is able to generate 
from its activities, including potentially through changes in 
commission rates, the size of the market that is intermediated, 
or the Group’s market share.

In addition, significant expenditure is being incurred in 
order to comply with the regulations, including the costs 
of development, launch and the ongoing running of new 
electronic platforms and associated technology infrastructure, 
and additional compliance resources. In 2014, the charge in 
the income statement for these additional costs was 3% 
of revenue. 

Commercial and competitive environment
The Group operates in a competitive and dynamic 
environment, and the markets in which the Group competes 
are characterised by rapidly changing technology, evolving 
customer demand and uses of services, and the potential 
emergence of new industry standards and practices. Such 
changes may increase the risk that the Group faces additional 
costs or barriers to entry to markets that its competitors do 
not experience. New entrants or new methods of delivering 
broking services may gain first mover advantage that the 
Group may not be able to respond to in a timely manner.

The Group competes with other interdealer brokers for staff. 
The costs of employing front office broking staff is currently the 
largest cost faced by the Group. The effect of the competition 
for broking staff can result in an increase in staff costs, or if 
staff leave the Group, can result in the loss of capability, 
customer relationships and expertise.

Consolidation within the industry or integration with adjacent 
sectors may provide competing firms or platforms with 
advantages of scale, access to wider pools of liquidity, or service 
capability that may put the Group at a competitive disadvantage.

Management of the cost base
The Group actively manages its cost base, by seeking to 
reduce fixed costs and to maintain flexibility in the cost base, 
to support its profitability as circumstances require it. The 
Group has in the past undertaken major restructuring 
programmes involving the exit, or restructuring of contracts, 
of staff, and the exit from certain activities. The Group may 
undertake further restructurings from time to time in the 
future, and any such future restructuring might involve 
significant costs or have a disruptive effect on the Group’s 
business, or the anticipated benefits of any restructuring 
might not be realised in full.

Changes in the carrying value of goodwill
The Group’s consolidated balance sheet includes a balance 
relating to goodwill. The initial recognition of goodwill 
represents the excess of the costs of acquisitions over the 
identifiable net assets of the entities acquired. The carrying 
value of the goodwill allocated to each region is reviewed for 
impairment at least annually. Impairment testing requires that 
the estimated value of the business in each region is compared 
with the balance sheet carrying value of the business in that 
region, including goodwill, and any shortfall is recognised as 
an impairment of goodwill. Changes in the estimated value of 
the business for each region from time to time may result in 
impairments in the carrying value of goodwill.

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |    7

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationStrategic Report continued

Overview 

Market conditions remained challenging throughout 2014 as 
the overall level of activity in the financial markets remained 
subdued, although there was some pick-up in activity in some 
products and markets in the second half of the year.

In the light of the continuation of difficult market conditions 
a number of actions were taken during the year to further 
reduce headcount and other fixed costs in order to maintain 
flexibility in costs and to align the cost base with the lower 
level of revenue. The benefit of this cost improvement 
programme, together with the continued benefit from cost 
management actions taken in previous years, is reflected in 
the maintenance of the underlying operating margin at 14.3%, 
compared with 14.4% in the previous year, despite the 
reduction in revenue.

Market conditions and revenue
The Group generates revenue from commissions it earns 
by facilitating and executing customer orders. The level 
of revenue is substantially dependent on customer trading 
volumes which are affected by the level of volatility in 
financial markets, by customers’ risk appetite, and by 
their willingness and ability to trade.

Volatility is one of the key drivers of activity in the 
financial markets. Measures of financial market volatility, 
which reached post financial crisis lows during the first half 
of the year, picked up during the second half. The business 
experienced the effects of the pick-up in volatility most 
strongly in Asia Pacific and in some products in North 
America, but the level of market activity in Europe and the 
Middle East continued to be largely subdued reflecting the 
cyclical effect of further flattening and lowering of yield 
curves and spread compression in bond markets.

Market volumes also continue to be adversely affected by the 
more onerous regulatory environment applicable to many of 
our customers. Regulators worldwide have been adopting an 
increased level of scrutiny in supervising the financial markets 
and they continue to generally tighten the capital, leverage 
and liquidity requirements of commercial and investment 
banks, and to implement steps to limit or separate their 
activities in order to reduce risk. This has reduced risk appetite 
and reduced the willingness and ability of our customers 
to trade.

The introduction of new regulatory reforms directly affecting 
the operation of the OTC derivatives markets has also created 
some uncertainty and has resulted in the fragmentation of 
some liquidity pools which has also reduced market volumes.

Excluding PVM Oil Associates, which was acquired on 26 
November 2014, revenue in 2014 was 10% lower than in 2013 
at constant exchange rates. Consistent with the lower level of 
market activity, revenue in the first half of the year was 15% 
lower than last year, and was 5% lower in the second half. 

Cost management and operating margin
In the light of the continuation of difficult market conditions 
a number of actions were taken during the year to further 
reduce headcount and other fixed costs. This cost improvement 
programme has involved the exit of 166 front office staff, 
51 support and other staff, and the vacating of office space, 
reducing annual fixed costs by over £45m with an annualised 

8    |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

operating profit benefit, as previously estimated, of around 
£35m. Just over half that amount has been realised in 2014, 
with the balance expected to flow through in 2015. The cost of 
these actions is £46.7m, of which £22.0m are non-cash charges, 
including the £3.2m write down of an employment incentive 
grant receivable that may not be recoverable due to the 
reduction in headcount. This cost has been charged as an 
exceptional item in the 2014 accounts.

The objectives of the cost improvement programme, and 
the objectives of actions taken in previous years, have been 
to preserve the variable nature of broker compensation and 
to reduce it as a percentage of broking revenue, and to 
generally reduce fixed costs throughout the business, in order 
to ensure that the business is well positioned to respond to 
less favourable market conditions and to maintain operating 
margins. Broker compensation costs as a percentage of 
broking revenue have reduced to 56.1% in 2014, 2.2% points 
lower than in 2013, and 3.7% points lower than in 2012. The 
overall contribution margin of the business after broker 
employment costs and other front office direct and variable 
costs was 2.0% points higher in 2014 than in the prior year, but 
reflecting the lower level of revenue, the absolute amount of 
contribution was 6% lower at constant exchange rates.

The management and support costs of the business are 
not directly variable with revenue. Despite the increase in 
the costs of the regulatory readiness project (which covers 
the development, launch and ongoing running costs of 
new electronic platforms and associated technology 
infrastructure, and additional compliance resources) to 3% 
of revenue compared with 2% in 2013, total management 
and support costs in 2014 are unchanged in absolute terms 
compared with 2013. As a percentage of revenue, however, 
the business’s management and support costs are higher in 
2014 than in 2013, offsetting the benefit from the higher 
contribution margin.

Business development
We have continued to focus on delivering innovative products 
and a first class broking service to our clients. Action has also 
been taken to develop and strengthen the broking business 
through hiring brokers and through acquisitions, and to 
develop the Group’s information sales and post-trade risk 
management services activities. 

The Company completed the acquisition of PVM Oil Associates 
Limited and its subsidiaries (‘PVM’), a leading independent 
broker of oil instruments, on 26 November 2014. PVM is 
focused entirely on energy products, and has a long history as 
an international crude oil and products broker covering OTC 
swaps, forwards and physical crude oil and refined products, 
and exchange traded instruments including WTI, Brent and 
Gasoil futures. PVM’s customers are major oil companies, 
independent refiners and producers, government agencies, 
trading houses, banks, investment funds and corporations.

The acquisition of PVM increases the scale of the Group’s 
activities in the energy sector, particularly in Europe, and will 
give the Group a significant presence in broking crude oil and 
petroleum products, complementing its existing activities in 
these areas. Crude oil is the world’s most actively traded 
commodity. The acquisition will also allow Tullett Prebon 

Information to expand its data offering to include the current 
and historical oil price data generated from the PVM business 
and to offer this data to a broader set of customers.

PVM’s unaudited management accounts for the 12 months 
to December 2014 show revenue of $125.8m (£76.2m) with 
operating profit of $21.2m (£12.9m). In its audited accounts 
for the year ended 31 July 2013, PVM reported revenue of 
$107.5m, with operating profit of $18.2m. PVM’s broker 
headcount at the end of 2014 was 129.

Information relating to the consideration for the acquisition of 
PVM, its balance sheet, and the impact on the Group’s Income 
Statement for 2014 and on a pro forma basis, is set out in the 
Financial Review below.

In early January 2015, the Company announced the expansion 
of its broking activities in North America through the 
acquisition of 40 brokers from Murphy & Durieu, a New York 
based interdealer broker. The 40 new brokers have expertise 
and access to deep liquidity pools in a wide range of fixed 
income products including corporate bonds, convertibles, 
municipal bonds and government securities, allowing the 
business to provide even stronger and better execution to 
clients in the US Fixed Income market.

For the fifth consecutive year the Company was voted 
number one in more product categories than any other single 
interdealer broker in Risk magazine’s 2014 annual interdealer 
rankings published in September. Dealers across the wholesale 
banking markets in all three regions in which the business 
operates voted Tullett Prebon number one in 32 out of 99 
categories, reflecting the Company’s focus on first class 
service and delivery of flexible and innovative products.

The business was also named Commodities Interdealer Broker 
of the Year at GlobalCapital’s 2014 Global Derivatives Awards 
in October, Best Broker for Forward FX for the fourteenth year 
running at the 2014 FX Week Best Bank Awards in November, 
and Commodities Broker of the Year and Innovator of the Year 
in the 2014 Futures and Options World awards in December.

The majority of OTC product markets are not characterised 
by continuous trading, and depend upon the intervention 
and support of voice brokers for their liquidity and effective 
operation. The business has continued to focus on its hybrid 
electronic broking offering, deploying platforms to comply 
with regulatory requirements and to respond to market 
demand. The platforms we offer provide clients with the 
flexibility to transact either entirely electronically or in 
conjunction with the business’s comprehensive voice 
execution broker network. 

The business in all three regions is supported by the 
deployment of the Group’s electronic broking platforms. 
The platforms facilitate client trading through electronic 
execution or with voice broker support, and provide a range 
of functionality including streaming prices, analytics, and 
auction capability, and operate as highly efficient front end 
order management and trade capture systems for both 
brokers and customers.

The Information Sales business was awarded, for the fourth 
consecutive year, the title of Best Data Provider (Broker) at the 
Inside Market Data Awards in May. Clients continue to 

demand an ever higher standard of independent, quality data 
and the award, which is determined by an independent poll of 
end-users, reaffirms the industry’s recognition of our position 
as the leading provider of the highest quality independent 
price information and data from the global OTC markets.

Whilst the vast majority of the trades we arrange for 
customers involve voice brokers, a growing proportion 
of our broking activity is supported by and relies upon the 
functionality provided by electronic platforms. The revenue 
from those products supported by electronic platforms, 
together with the revenue from the Information Sales and 
Risk Management Services businesses, accounted for over 
30% of total revenue in 2014.

Our key financial and performance indicators for 2014, 
excluding PVM in order to aid the comparison with those 
for 2013, are summarised in the table below. 

Revenue

£696.0m

£803.7m

-10%*

2014

2013

Change

Underlying operating 
profit

Underlying operating 
margin

Average broker 
headcount 

Average revenue per  
broker (£’000)

Broker employment 
costs: broking revenue

Broker headcount 
(year end)

Broking support  
headcount (year end)

£99.2m

£115.4m

-13%*

14.3%

14.4% -0.1% points

1,625

1,702

400

430

-5%

-7%*

56.1%

58.3% -2.2% points

1,573

1,687

704

747

-7%

-6%

*  At constant exchange rates

Underlying operating profit is operating profit before exceptional and 
acquisition related items. A table showing Underlying and Reported figures 
for each year, detailing the exceptional and acquisition related items, is 
included in the Financial Review.

Average broker headcount during 2014 was 5% lower than 
during the previous year, with the year end broker headcount 
of 1,573, 7% lower than at the end of 2013, reflecting the exit 
of headcount through the cost improvement programme. 
The lower level of market activity in 2014 is reflected in the 
reduction in average revenue per broker which, at £400k for 
2014, is 7% lower than for 2013.

Including PVM and the 40 brokers acquired from Murphy & 
Durieu in January this year, the pro forma year end broker 
headcount was 1,742.

The year end broking support headcount of 704 was 6% lower 
than at the end of 2013, reflecting the exit of staff through 
the cost reduction programme.

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |    9

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
Strategic Report continued

Operating Review

The tables below analyse revenue by region and by product 
group, and underlying operating profit by region, for 2014 
compared with 2013.

Revenue
A significant proportion of the Group’s activity is conducted 
outside the UK and the reported revenue is therefore 
impacted by the movement in the foreign exchange rates 
used to translate the revenue from non-UK operations. The 
tables therefore show revenue for 2013 translated at the 
same exchange rates as those used for 2014, with growth 
rates calculated on the same basis. The revenue figures as 
reported for 2013 are shown in Note 4 to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements.

The commentary below reflects the presentation in the tables.

Revenue by product group

Treasury Products

Interest Rate Derivatives

Fixed Income

Equities

Energy

Information Sales and 
Risk Management 
Services

At constant exchange 
rates

Exchange translation

Reported

2014 
£m

190.5

140.6

186.5

39.5

100.0

2013
 £m

203.1

166.9

218.0

41.6

101.6

46.4

46.0

703.5

703.5

777.2

26.5

803.7

Change

-6%

-16%

-14%

-5%

-2%

+1%

-9%

-12%

Revenue was 9% lower in 2014 than in 2013 at constant 
exchange rates, driven by lower volumes in the traditional 
interdealer broker product groups of Interest Rate Derivatives 
and Fixed Income in Europe and North America.

Revenue from Treasury Products (FX and cash) was 6% lower, 
reflecting the lower level of market activity in the major 
currency spot and forward FX markets in Europe and North 
America, partly offset by higher activity in emerging markets 
currencies, particularly in offshore Renminbi products and 
forward JPY in Asia Pacific.

Levels of activity in most Interest Rate Derivatives products 
(swaps and options) were subdued throughout the period 
reflecting the further flattening of yield curves for major 
currencies. Activity in Asia Pacific was generally stronger, 
particularly in the second half of the year.

The Fixed Income product group includes government and 
government agency bonds, corporate bonds and related 
derivatives. The decline in revenue reflects the generally 
subdued levels of activity in the government and government 
agency bond markets in Europe and North America, partly 
offset by higher levels of activity in emerging markets’ 
bonds in North America.

10  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

Our Equities business in the Americas delivered a strong 
performance, with increases in revenue from both equity 
derivatives and the ADR and GDR conversion desk, but 
this was offset by lower activity in Europe, particularly 
in index options.

Revenue from Energy products, including the £7.5m of 
revenue from PVM since acquisition, was 2% lower than in 
2013, held back by lower activity in power markets, and in 
some oil products and commodities particularly in the first 
half of the year. 

Revenue from Information Sales and Risk Management 
Services was 1% higher than last year, with increased revenue 
from the Information Sales business through a combination 
of expansion in its customer base and the addition of new 
content sets distributed both directly and via its market 
data vendor customers, offset by lower revenue from Risk 
Management Services where market conditions have 
remained challenging reflecting low interest rate volatility. 

Revenue by region

Europe and the Middle 
East

Americas

Asia Pacific

At constant exchange 
rates

Exchange translation

Reported

2014
£m

405.6

201.6

96.3

703.5

703.5

2013
 £m

465.6

219.2

92.4

777.2

26.5

803.7

Change

-13%

-8%

+4%

-9%

-12%

Europe and the Middle East
Revenue in Europe and the Middle East, including £6.4m of 
revenue from PVM since acquisition, was 13% lower than in 
2013 at constant exchange rates. Broking revenue was 14% 
lower than last year, partly offset by growth in revenue from 
Information Sales. Revenue in the first half of 2014 was 18% 
lower than in 2013, and in the second half was 7% lower than 
in 2013. 

The difficult market conditions severely affected the 
traditional major product areas of forward FX, interest rate 
swaps and government and corporate bonds, which account 
for a significant proportion of the revenue in the region. 
Revenue from emerging markets products held up better than 
those in the G7 currencies, including a good performance in 
South African Rand bonds and forward FX, benefiting from 
the opening of an office in Johannesburg, and in Eastern 
European and Turkish forward FX. Revenue from energy and 
commodities was held back by weaker power markets, but 
with the inclusion of PVM was in line with the prior year. 

The business has continued to develop its presence in the 
Middle East through further transfers of brokers from London 
during the year, and revenue from the offices in Dubai and 
Bahrain was 17% higher in 2014 than in 2013, reflecting the 
increase in broker headcount in those centres. Headcount in 
London, and in the offices in continental Europe, was lower 
than last year reflecting the transfers to the Middle East and 

the reduction through the cost improvement programme. 
Year end broker headcount in EMEA was 734. Average broker 
headcount for the region was 6% lower than last year, with 
average revenue per broker 10% lower than in the prior year 
reflecting the lower level of market activity.

Americas
Revenue in the Americas was 8% lower in 2014 than in 2013 
at constant exchange rates. Revenue in the first half was 13% 
lower than in the same period in 2013, with revenue in the 
second half 2% lower than in 2013.

The reduction in the overall level of market activity in the 
Americas in 2014 particularly affected the revenue from 
Interest Rate Derivatives and from government and agency 
Fixed Income, which were subdued throughout the year. 
The improvement in market conditions in North America 
in the second half of the year resulted in a much stronger 
performance in Treasury Products (FX and cash) and in credit 
products, with revenue in the second half up 25% and 15% 
respectively compared with the same period a year earlier. The 
Equities business in the region performed strongly throughout 
2014 with revenue from both equity derivatives and the ADR 
and GDR conversion desk up by over 25%, benefiting from the 
continued investment in the business. The business in Brazil 
experienced a sharp decline in revenue in the first half of the 
year reflecting a less buoyant economy and much reduced 
market activity, but conditions improved in the second half 
with revenue 7% higher than in the same period in the 
prior year.

Average broker headcount in the Americas was 3% lower than 
in 2013, with average revenue per broker 5% lower. Including 
the brokers hired from Murphy & Durieu who started with the 
business at the beginning of 2015 the pro forma year end 
broker headcount in the Americas was 542.

Asia Pacific
Revenue in Asia Pacific was 4% higher than last year at constant 
exchange rates. Broking revenue was 5% higher with revenue 
from the Risk Management Services business which is operated 
from the region slightly lower than last year reflecting the low 
interest rate volatility. Regional revenue was 4% lower in the 
first half than in the same period in 2013, with a 14% increase 
in the second half as market conditions improved.

Over 80% of the broking revenue in the region comes from 
Treasury Products and Interest Rate Derivatives. Revenue from 
Treasury Products was 14% higher than last year, benefiting 
from the high levels of activity throughout the year in 
offshore Renminbi products. Activity in many of the interest 
rate swaps markets in the region was lower in the first half 
than a year ago, but activity picked up in the second half, to 
leave revenue from Interest Rate Derivatives slightly higher for 
the full year. The region increased its revenue from Energy and 
Commodities where it has continued to build its presence and 
extend its product coverage, particularly in oil products.

Average broker headcount in the region was 5% lower than in 
2013, with average revenue per broker up 10%. Year end 
broker headcount in Asia Pacific was 337.

Underlying operating profit
The revenue, underlying operating profit and operating 
margin by region shown below are as reported.

Revenue – as reported

£m

2014

2013

Change

Europe and the Middle 
East

Americas

Asia Pacific

Reported

405.6

201.6

96.3

703.5

468.7

233.9

101.1

803.7

-13%

-14%

-5%

-12%

Underlying operating profit

£m

2014

2013

Change

Europe and the Middle 
East

Americas

Asia Pacific

Reported

80.1

10.5

10.1

97.9

10.4

7.1

100.7

115.4

Underlying operating margin by region

Europe and the Middle East

Americas

Asia Pacific

2014

19.8%

5.2%

10.5%

14.3%

-18%

+1%

+42%

-13%

2013

20.9%

4.4%

7.0%

14.4%

Underlying operating profit in Europe and the Middle East 
of £80.1m was 18% lower than in the prior year, and with 
revenue down 13% the underlying operating margin has 
reduced by 1.1% points, to 19.8%. Broker employment costs 
as a percentage of broking revenue have fallen by 1.1% points 
but the benefit of this has been offset by the operational 
leverage effect of lower revenue.

In the Americas the underlying operating profit of £10.5m 
is slightly higher than in 2013 despite the 14% reduction in 
revenue, and the underlying operating margin has improved 
to 5.2%. Broker employment costs as a percentage of revenue 
have been reduced significantly, and other front office costs 
have also been reduced. The broking contribution margin 
(before management and support costs) has improved by 
more than 3% points, but this benefit has been partly offset 
by the operational leverage effect of lower revenue.

Underlying operating profit in Asia Pacific has increased by 
over 40% to £10.1m, and the underlying operating margin 
in the region has increased to 10.5% from 7.0%. Broker 
employment costs as a percentage of broking revenue and 
other front office costs have been reduced, and the benefit 
of the higher contribution margin has been complemented 
by the operational leverage effect of the higher revenue. 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  11

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationStrategic Report continued

Litigation

Regulatory Matters

The Company announced on 29 October 2014 that the SFO 
had issued criminal proceedings against Noel Cryan, a former 
employee, in connection with the manipulation of LIBOR. 
The Company has been asked to provide information to the 
Financial Conduct Authority (‘FCA’) and other regulators and 
government agencies in connection with their enquiries in 
relation to LIBOR and is co-operating fully with those requests. 
The Company is currently under investigation by the FCA 
in relation to certain ‘wash trades’ (trades that are risk free, 
with no commercial rationale or economic purpose, on which 
brokerage is paid) carried out by two former employees, 
one of whom is Noel Cryan. As part of this investigation 
the Company continues to co-operate with regulators and 
government agencies. 

Financial Review

The results for 2014 compared with those for 2013 are shown 
in the tables below.

2014

Income Statement 
£m

Revenue 

Operating profit

Charge relating to cost 
improvement 
programme

Credit relating to major 
legal actions

Acquisition costs

Amortisation of 
acquisition deferred 
consideration

Goodwill impairment

Operating profit

Net finance expense

Profit before tax

Tax

Associates

Minorities

Earnings

Average number of 
shares

Basic EPS

Exceptional 
and 
acquisition 
related items 

Underlying

703.5

100.7

Reported

703.5

100.7

(46.7)

(46.7)

3.1

(1.8)

(0.9)

(6.8)

(53.1)

(53.1)

6.5

(46.6)

3.1

(1.8)

(0.9)

(6.8)

47.6

(14.1)

33.5

(10.4)

1.9

(0.4)

24.6

220.4m

11.2p

100.7

(14.1)

86.6

(16.9)

1.9

(0.4)

71.2

220.4m

32.3p

The legal actions that the Company had been pursuing against 
BGC Partners Inc. and certain of its subsidiaries (collectively 
‘BGC’) as well as former employees in the US in response to 
the raid on the business by BGC in the second half of 2009 
have concluded.

The outcome of the FINRA arbitration on the claims against BGC 
and former employees brought by the subsidiary companies in 
the United States which were raided by BGC, along with various 
claims asserted against those subsidiary companies, was 
determined in July 2014. 

The Arbitrators determined that BGC and certain of the raided 
brokers should pay $33.3m in compensatory damages to the 
subsidiary companies on account of the claims against them. 
The Arbitrators also determined that the subsidiary companies 
should pay $6.1m in compensatory damages to a representative 
of the former equity holders of Chapdelaine Corporate 
Securities & Co. which the Company acquired in January 2007 
on account of certain of their claims, and $0.2m (£0.1m) to one 
of the raided brokers. The net $27.0m (£16.0m) compensatory 
damages were received in August 2014.

The separate action taken by the Company and certain 
of its subsidiaries against BGC in the New Jersey Superior 
Court, alleging claims for racketeering, unfair competition, 
misappropriation of confidential information and trade 
secrets, and tortious interference, has also concluded.

The Company entered into an agreement with BGC on 13 
January 2015 under which BGC will pay $100m (£66m) to the 
Company to settle the litigation in the New Jersey Superior 
Court. In a prior ruling, the Judge had dismissed the Company’s 
claim under the New Jersey racketeering law, and any damages 
that would have been awarded by the jury in the case would 
therefore not have been subject to trebling.

The settlement agreement also settles all other outstanding 
litigation between the parties, which will now be dismissed, 
and includes a clause that prevents either party hiring desk 
heads and senior management from the other for one year 
from the date of the agreement.

The first $25m of the $100m settlement was paid to the 
Company in January 2015, and the balance of $75m will be 
paid to the Company before the end of March 2015. The 
income will be taxed in the UK at the standard rate of 
corporation tax applicable in 2015.

Consistent with the treatment adopted in previous years, the 
costs incurred in 2014 in relation to these actions, net of the 
compensatory damages received during the year, have been 
included as an exceptional charge in the income statement. 
The exceptional item in the income statement in 2014 is a 
net credit of £3.1m (2013: net charge £15.2m). The $100m 
settlement will be recognised in exceptional items in the 
income statement in 2015.

The Company has a duty to shareholders to seek to protect 
its legal rights and interests, and although legal action can be 
uncertain, protracted and expensive, the Company believes it 
is appropriate to take action in order to do so.

12  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

2013

Income Statement 
£m

Revenue 

Operating profit 

Charge relating to major 
legal actions

Operating profit

Net finance expense

Profit before tax

Tax

Associates

Minorities

Earnings

Underlying

Exceptional 
items 

Reported

803.7

115.4

115.4

(15.8)

99.6

(22.4)

1.4

(0.2)

78.4

(15.2)

(15.2)

(15.2)

2.4

(12.8)

803.7

115.4

(15.2)

100.2

(15.8)

84.4

(20.0)

1.4

(0.2)

65.6

217.8m

30.1p

Average number of 
shares

Basic EPS

217.8m

36.0p

Net finance expense
An analysis of the net finance expense is shown in the 
table below.

£m

2014

2013

Receivable on cash balances

Payable on Sterling Notes August 2014

Payable on Sterling Notes July 2016

Payable on Sterling Notes June 2019

Payable on bank facilities, including 
commitment fee

Amortisation of debt issue costs

Other interest

Net cash finance expense

Net non-cash finance income

1.4

(0.4)

(9.9)

(4.2)

(1.5)

(1.1)

(0.5)

(16.2)

2.1

(14.1)

1.8

(0.6)

(9.9)

(4.2)

(1.7)

(2.3)

(0.3)

(17.2)

1.4

(15.8)

The net cash finance expense of £16.2m in 2014 is £1.0m 
lower than in 2013. The reduction primarily reflects the 
non-recurrence in 2014 of the £0.9m of accelerated 
amortisation of debt issue costs recognised in 2013 that 
related to the bank debt that was repaid during that year.

The net non-cash finance income comprises the net of the 
expected return and interest on pension scheme assets 
and liabilities of £2.2m (2013: £1.9m), partly offset by the 
amortisation of the discount on deferred consideration.

Tax
The effective rate of tax on underlying PBT is 19.5% (2013: 
22.5%). The 3.0% point reduction in the effective rate reflects 
the benefit of the reduction in the UK statutory rate of 
corporation tax to 21.5% for 2014, 1.75% points lower than 
for 2013, and the release of some provisions relating to tax 
uncertainties which have been resolved. Excluding the benefit 
from the release of provisions, the effective rate of tax on 
underlying PBT would have been 23.1% (2013: 24.4%).

The tax credit on exceptional items reflects the net tax 
relief recognised on those items at the relevant rate for the 
jurisdiction in which the charges are borne. No tax relief has 
been recognised on the exceptional charges and credits arising 
in the USA in either 2014 or 2013 due to the current low level 
of taxable profit in that jurisdiction. In addition, there is no 
tax effect relating to the non-cash charge for the impairment 
of goodwill.

Acquisition of PVM
The total consideration for the acquisition of the equity 
of the PVM, which had no debt, and on the assumption 
that the business had nil net working capital at completion, 
is $160.0m.

The initial consideration of $112.0m (£71.1m at the agreed 
exchange rate of $1.5747) was satisfied through the issue of 
25.8m new ordinary shares in the Company.

Deferred consideration of up to $48.0m is subject to the 
achievement of revenue targets in the three years after 
completion, which together with any required adjustment 
to reflect the actual amount of working capital and available 
cash acquired at completion (estimated to be $10m), will be 
satisfied through the further issue of new Ordinary Shares in 
the Company, or cash, at the discretion of the Company. The 
payment of deferred consideration to an individual vendor is 
linked to their continued service with the business and the 
deferred consideration amount will therefore be amortised 
through the income statement over the three years following 
completion. This charge will be reported as an acquisition 
related item and not in underlying operating profit. The 2014 
Income Statement includes a charge of $1.3m (£0.9m) for the 
period since completion of the acquisition, and the full year 
charge for 2015 will be $16m (£10.3m at the 2014 year end 
exchange rate). The charge is a capital item for the Company 
and does not attract corporation tax relief.

The Group’s estimate of the fair value of the net assets 
acquired is $17.9m, comprising fixed assets of $1.6m, net 
working capital liabilities of $11.1m and cash of $27.4m. 

In the period from 26 November 2014, the date of completion 
of the acquisition, to the end of the year, PVM’s revenue was 
£7.5m, with underlying Operating profit, and PBT, of £1.5m, and 
underlying earnings of £1.1m, after a tax charge at an effective 
rate of 23.7% on underlying PBT, in line with the effective rate 
of tax applicable to PVM for the 12 months to 31 December 
2014. The acquisition was therefore accretive to earnings per 
share, with earnings of 42.3p per share issued for the initial 
consideration, weighted for the period since acquisition. 

PVM’s unaudited management accounts for the 12 months 
to December 2014 show revenue of $125.8m (£76.2m), 
underlying Operating profit of $21.2m (£12.9m), underlying 
PBT of $21.5m (£13.0m), and earnings of $16.3m (£9.9m). 
On a pro forma basis, assuming PVM had been acquired 
on 1 January 2014 and using PVM’s unaudited management 
accounts for 2014, the acquisition would have been accretive 
to underlying earnings per share, with underlying earnings of 
38.4p per share issued for the initial consideration.

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  13

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationStrategic Report continued

Exceptional and acquisition related items
The £46.7m charge relating to the cost improvement 
programme, the £3.1m credit (2013: £15.2m charge) relating 
to the major legal actions, and the £0.9m charge relating to 
the amortisation of acquisition deferred consideration, are 
discussed above.

The £1.8m charge relating to acquisition costs reflects the 
legal and professional costs incurred in relation to the 
acquisition of PVM.

The £6.8m charge relating to goodwill impairment reflects the 
write down in the balance sheet carrying value of the Group’s 
business in Brazil. For the purposes of goodwill impairment 
testing, Brazil is regarded as a separate region of the Group. 
The carrying value of the goodwill attributed to each region is 
tested for impairment annually. The estimated value for each 
region is compared with the balance sheet carrying value of 
the region, including goodwill, and any shortfall is recognised 
as an impairment. Market conditions in Brazil have been 
challenging in the last two years, and revenue has fallen by 
nearly one quarter since 2012. The business continues to be 
profitable but the absolute level of operating profit has fallen 
below the level required to support the carrying value. 

Basic EPS
The average number of shares used for the basic EPS calculation 
of 220.4m reflects the 217.7m shares in issue at the beginning 
of the year, plus 2.6m reflecting the 25.8m shares issued on 
26 November 2014 in satisfaction of the initial consideration 
payable for PVM, plus the 0.3m shares that are issuable when 
vested options are exercised, less the 0.2m shares held 
throughout the year by the Employee Benefit Trust which 
has waived its rights to dividends. 

Exchange and hedging
The income statements of the Group’s non-UK operations are 
translated into Sterling at average exchange rates. The most 
significant exchange rates for the Group are the US dollar, the 
Euro, the Singapore dollar and the Japanese yen. The balance 
sheets of the Group’s non-UK operations are translated into 
Sterling using year end exchange rates. The major balance 
sheet translation exposure is to the US dollar. The Group’s 
current policy is not to hedge income statement or balance 
sheet translation exposure.

Average and year end exchange rates used in the preparation 
of the Financial Statements are shown below.

US dollar

Euro

Average

Year End

2014

$1.65

€1.24

2013

$1.56

€1.18

2014

$1.56

€1.29

2013

$1.66

€1.20

Singapore dollar

S$2.09

S$1.95

S$2.07

S$2.09

Japanese yen

¥174

¥151

¥187

¥174

Cash flow

Underlying Operating profit

Share-based compensation and other 
non-cash items

Depreciation and amortisation

Accelerated depreciation – fire 
damaged assets

EBITDA

Capital expenditure (net of disposals)

Decrease in initial contract prepayment

Other working capital

Operating cash flow

Exceptional items – cost improvement 
programme 2014

Exceptional items – restructuring 
2011/2012

Exceptional items – major legal actions 
net cash flow

Interest

Taxation

Dividends received from associates/
(paid) to minorities

Acquisitions/investments

Cash flow

2014
 £m

100.7

0.9

13.6

–

115.2

(11.0)

8.7

(21.9)

91.0

2013
 £m

115.4

1.0

11.9

1.5

129.8

(17.0)

16.6

(21.7)

107.7

(17.0)

–

(0.9)

(3.2)

3.1

(15.2)

(15.9)

0.8

(8.7)

37.2

(15.2)

(14.9)

(27.5)

0.7

(2.3)

45.3

The operating cash flow in 2014 of £91.0m represents a 
conversion of 90% (2013: £107.7m and 93%) of underlying 
operating profit into cash.

Capital expenditure of £11.0m includes the development 
of electronic platforms and ‘straight through processing’ 
technology, and investment in IT and communications 
infrastructure.

The initial contract prepayment balance has reduced further 
in 2014, as the payments in the year were lower than the 
amortisation charge.

The other working capital outflow in 2014 reflects an increase 
in trade receivables due to the higher revenue in December 
2014 than in the same month in the previous year, reductions 
in bonus accruals due to the lower level of broking revenue 
throughout the second half of the year compared with the 
previous year and the reduction in management and support 
staff bonuses which are paid annually, and the payment in 
December 2014 of £5.5m of payroll related creditors included 
in the acquisition balance sheet of PVM reflecting the 
withholdings from payments made to staff shortly before 
completion of the acquisition.

14  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
During 2014 the Group made £17.0m of cash payments 
relating to actions taken under the 2014 cost improvement 
programme, and £0.9m relating to the 2011/12 restructuring 
programme. Most of the remaining £8.0m of cash payments 
associated with the implementation of the cost improvement 
programme are expected to be made during 2015.

The major legal actions net cash inflow of £3.1m is in line 
with the credit in the income statement, and reflects the 
payments for legal costs made during the year, net of the 
$27.0m (£16.0m) compensatory damages awarded by the 
FINRA arbitrators that were received in August 2014.

Interest payments in 2014 reflect the income statement 
charge for net cash finance expenses excluding the charge 
for the amortisation of debt issue costs.

Tax payments in 2014 of £15.9m were lower than the 
payments made in 2013 primarily reflecting lower tax 
payments in the UK due to the reduction in the UK tax charge, 
lower net payments in Asia due to some refunds received in 
2014, and the return of tax deposits previously paid in Brazil.

The cash payments relating to acquisitions and investments 
in 2014 includes the £1.8m of costs incurred in relation to the 
acquisition of PVM, and £1.4m of costs incurred in relation to 
the issuance of the equity to satisfy the initial consideration 
for that acquisition, together with the £3.6m payment to secure 
the release of the brokers from Murphy & Durieu, the £1.2m 
purchase of our former partner’s equity interest in our main 
business in Japan which was previously operated as a joint 
venture, and the final £0.7m payment of deferred consideration 
relating to the acquisition of Convenção in Brazil.

The movement in cash and debt is summarised below.

£m

At 31 December 2013

Cash flow

Dividends

Debt repayments

Amortisation of debt 
issue costs

Cash acquired with 
subsidiaries

Effect of movement in 
exchange rates

At 31 December 2014

Cash

282.8

37.2

(36.7)

(8.5)

Debt

(227.6)

–

–

8.5

Net

55.2

37.2

(36.7)

–

–

(0.6)

(0.6)

17.5

5.5

297.8

–

–

(219.7)

17.5

5.5

78.1

At 31 December 2014 the Group held cash, cash equivalents 
and other financial assets of £297.8m which exceeded the 
debt outstanding by £78.1m.

Debt finance
The composition of the Group’s outstanding debt is 
summarised below.

£m

6.52% Sterling Notes August 2014

7.04% Sterling Notes July 2016

5.25% Sterling Notes June 2019

Unamortised debt issue costs

At 31 Dec 
2014

At 31 Dec 
2013

–

141.1

80.0

(1.4)

8.5

141.1

80.0

(2.0)

219.7

227.6

The £8.5m Sterling Notes were repaid at their maturity in 
August 2014. In addition to the outstanding Notes, the Group 
has a committed £150m revolving credit facility that has 
remained undrawn through the period, which matures in 
April 2016.

Pensions
The Group has one defined benefit pension Scheme in the UK 
following the merger during 2012 of the two schemes which 
were acquired with Tullett plc and Prebon Marshall Yamane. 
The Scheme is closed to new members and future accrual.

The triennial actuarial valuation of the Scheme as at 30 April 
2013 was concluded in January 2014. The actuarial funding 
surplus of the Scheme at that date was £64.2m and under the 
agreed schedule of contributions the Company will continue 
not to make any payments into the Scheme.

The assets and liabilities of the Scheme are included in the 
Consolidated Balance Sheet in accordance with IAS19. The 
Scheme’s invested assets returned 16% (net of fees) during the 
year, and the fair value of the Scheme’s assets at the end of the 
year was £255.7m (2013: £226.1m). The value of the Scheme’s 
liabilities at the end of 2014 calculated in accordance with 
IAS19 was £193.6m (2013: £175.6m). The valuation of the 
Scheme’s liabilities at the end of 2014 reflects the demographic 
assumptions adopted for the most recent triennial actuarial 
valuation and a discount rate of 3.7% (2013: 4.4%). Under IAS19 
the Scheme shows a surplus, before the related deferred tax 
liability, of £62.1m at 31 December 2014 (2013: £50.5m).

Return on capital employed
The return on capital employed (‘ROCE’) in 2014, excluding 
PVM, was 20% (2013: 24%). ROCE is calculated as underlying 
operating profit divided by the average capital employed in 
the business. Capital employed is defined as shareholders’ 
funds less net funds and the accounting pension surplus 
(net of deferred tax), adding back cumulative amortised 
and impaired goodwill and the post-tax reorganisation costs 
related to the integration of the Tullett and Prebon businesses.

The pro forma ROCE in 2014 for PVM calculated using the 
underlying operating profit per the unaudited management 
accounts for the full year 2014 and the value of the initial 
consideration is 20%.

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  15

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationStrategic Report continued

Regulatory capital
The Group’s lead regulator is the Financial Conduct Authority. 
As part of the application for the change in control approval 
from the FCA for the acquisition of PVM the Group applied for 
and has received a new Investment Firm Consolidation Waiver. 
The new waiver took effect on 25 September 2014 and will 
expire on 24 September 2024. 

The terms of the new waiver require the Group to eliminate 
the excess of its consolidated own funds requirements 
compared with its consolidated own funds (“excess goodwill”) 
over the ten year period to 24 September 2024. The amount of 
the excess goodwill must not exceed the amount determined 
as at the date the waiver took effect and must be reduced in 
line with a schedule over the ten years, with the first reduction 
of 25% required to be achieved by March 2017. The Company 
expects to achieve this reduction within its current business 
plan. The waiver also sets out conditions with respect to the 
maintenance of financial ratios relating to leverage, debt 
service and debt maturity profile.

Consistent with the previous waiver, under the terms of the 
new waiver each investment firm within the Group must be 
either a limited activity or a limited licence firm and must 
comply with its individual regulatory capital resources 
requirements. The Group is subject to the ‘financial holding 
company test’, and Tullett Prebon plc, as the parent company, 
must continue to maintain capital resources in excess of the 
sum of the solo notional capital resources requirements for 
each relevant firm within the Group.

The Group’s regulatory capital headroom under the financial 
holding company test calculated in accordance with Pillar 1 
at 31 December 2014 was £696m (2013: £608m).

Many of the Group’s broking entities are regulated on a 
‘solo’ basis, and are obliged to meet the regulatory capital 
requirements imposed by the local regulator of the jurisdiction 
in which the operate. The Group maintains an appropriate 
excess of financial resources in such entities.

Information disclosure under Pillar 3 is available on the 
Group’s website www.tullettprebon.com.

Risk Management 

This section sets out a summary of how risk is managed by 
the Group, covering the Group’s Enterprise Risk Management 
Framework and its Principal Risks.

The systems of internal control operated by the Group are 
designed to manage rather than eliminate the risk of failure 
to achieve business objectives, and can only provide 
reasonable and not absolute assurance against material 
misstatement or loss.

16  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

Enterprise Risk Management 
Framework

The Board has adopted an Enterprise Risk Management 
Framework (‘ERMF’), the purpose of which is to enable the 
Group to understand the risks to which it is exposed, and 
to manage them in line with the Group’s overall business 
objectives and within its stated risk appetite. The ERMF 
identifies processes, ownership, responsibilities and the 
risk oversight required to support effective implementation 
of the framework, and comprises four mutually reinforcing 
components:

•  A risk management philosophy which sets out the Group’s 

underlying attitude to the management of risk and 
addresses the Group’s risk appetite; 

•  A risk management culture which seeks to foster adoption 
of appropriate risk management principles and behaviours 
throughout the Group;

•  A risk management governance structure based on three 

lines of defence that segregate risk management (first line 
of defence) from risk oversight (second line of defence) and 
risk assurance (third line of defence); and

•  Risk management processes that enable identification, 

assessment, management and reporting of risk exposures.

Risk management philosophy
Effective risk management is essential for the financial 
strength and resilience of the Group, and for the achievement 
of its business objectives. The Board has the responsibility 
to ensure that the Group implements an appropriate risk 
management culture throughout the Group, underpinned 
by a robust framework of risk governance and controls, 
complying with all relevant laws and regulations. 

The Group has adopted core principles that set the context 
for the Group’s risk management activities. Risk management 
should be value enhancing so that current and potential risks 
are managed to support achievement of the Group’s business 
objectives and strategy. Risk management should address 
the expectations and requirements of the key stakeholders 
(shareholders and regulatory authorities). Risk oversight and 
assurance functions should be sufficiently independent of 
business decision taking and supported by adequate resources. 
The Board must clearly define its risk appetite, setting out the 
type and level of risk the Group is willing to accept in pursuit 
of its objectives. Risk management should be integrated into 
business processes of the Group, and both current and 
emerging risks should be managed as an integral aspect of 
the business management processes. Risk management 
should be proportionate and commensurate with the level 
and complexity of both the business model and the nature 
of associated risks. The cost of risk management should be 
proportionate to the value it creates for the Group, while 
ensuring that regulatory objectives are met. Risk management 
should be subject to continual review and enhancement to 
ensure that associated structures, systems and processes 
remain effective and reflect stakeholder expectations.

Risk management culture
The Board recognises that embedding a sound risk 
management culture is fundamental to the effective 
operation of the Group’s risk management framework, and 
sets the tone and manner in which the Group conducts its 
business activities through defined values and expected 
behaviours. The Board recognises that the Group must ensure 
that the risk management culture is implemented across all of 
its businesses and functions, such that all employees are 
aware of, and act in conformity with, the desired values and 
behaviours adopted by the Group in their day-to-day activities. 

The Group achieves the implementation of its desired risk 
management culture through a combination of frameworks, 
policies and practices, including: the Group cultural framework 
which puts market integrity at the heart of the business; Risk 
Appetite Statements that clearly define the type and level of 
risk the Group is willing to accept in pursuit of its objectives; 
Risk Management Policies that set out risk management 
expectations, including through the establishment of risk 
limits for each risk and the allocation of responsibility for 
identification, assessment, mitigation and reporting of risks 
to specific individuals; performance management that links 
staff appraisals and remuneration to risk management 
attitudes and behaviours; and corporate communications 
that reinforce awareness and understanding of the Group’s 
desired risk management culture and associated policies.

Risk management governance structure
The Board
The Board has overall responsibility for the management 
of risk within the Group. This includes determining the 
nature and extent of the principal risks it is willing to take in 
achieving its objectives, defining expectations for the Group’s 
risk culture, ensuring that it has an appropriate and effective 
risk management framework, setting the Group’s risk appetite 
and monitoring performance so that the Group remains 
within its risk appetite.

The Board has delegated risk governance responsibilities to 
certain committees. In 2015, the Board will form a new Risk 
Committee as a sub-committee of the Board, which will be 
responsible for the oversight of risk management across the 
Group. The committee structure will then include the Group 
Treasury and Risk Committee (first line of defence), the Risk 
Committee of the Board (second line of defence) and the 
Audit Committee (third line of defence). 

First line of defence – risk management within 
the business
The first line of defence comprises the management of the 
business units and support functions. The first line of defence 
has primary responsibility for ensuring that the business 
operates within risk appetite on a day-to-day basis. 

In discharging this responsibility, business management 
are responsible for identifying, assessing and managing 
any risks arising from their activities, and for adhering to 
all relevant risk management policies adopted by the Group. 
This includes ensuring the effective operation of any controls 
required to manage risk within appetite, and for ensuring 
that the employees for whom they are responsible are 

aware of, and competent to undertake, their role in the 
risk management process. 

The Group Treasury and Risk Committee (‘GTRC’) is an 
executive committee that is responsible for overseeing the 
day to day management of risks, and ensuring that the Group’s 
risk exposure remains within its risk appetite.

Second line of defence – risk oversight
The second line of defence comprises the risk and compliance 
functions which are separate from operational management 
and are responsible for overseeing and challenging the first line 
of defence as it undertakes the identification, assessment 
and management of risks, and for assisting the Board (and 
its various committees) in discharging its overall risk 
management responsibilities. 

In 2015, the Board will form a new Risk Committee as a 
sub-committee of the Board, which will be responsible for 
the oversight of risk management across the Group. The 
Risk Committee will comprise at least three members, with 
a majority of Non-executive Directors (‘NEDs’), one of whom 
will also serve as a member of the Audit Committee. The Risk 
Committee will be chaired by a NED with appropriate risk 
management expertise, and will be attended by the Chief 
Executive and Chief Risk Officer.

The Risk Committee will be supported by regional risk 
committees which will have the same oversight responsibilities 
as the Risk Committee, but exercised at a regional level. The 
regional risk committees will also chaired by a NED with risk 
management expertise.

The Group’s risk function is responsible for assisting the Board 
in the development of the Group’s risk appetite and framework; 
monitoring the implementation of the risk framework and 
regulatory requirements (including conduct and market 
integrity) and providing robust challenge to the first line 
in its risk management activities.

The compliance function is responsible for monitoring 
compliance with all applicable regulatory requirements, 
including those relating to conduct of business requirements, 
market abuse provisions and the prevention of financial crime.

Third line of defence – independent assurance
Internal Audit provides independent assurance on the design 
and operational effectiveness of the Group’s risk management 
framework and activity, including the performance of the various 
business units and support and oversight functions which 
constitute the first and second lines of defence. Internal Audit 
considers all relevant risk related information in constructing its 
audit plan, including risk exposure reports, the results of risk and 
control self-assessments, and specific risk events which have 
occurred (such as loss events or ‘near-misses’). Internal Audit has 
a direct reporting line to the Audit Committee.

The Audit Committee is a sub-committee of the Board, which 
discharges a number of risk management responsibilities, 
including the review of the effectiveness of the Group’s internal 
control and risk management procedures; the approval of the 
Group’s annual internal audit plan, and review of the internal 
audit function; and the review of all internal audit reports 
and related management actions. The Audit Committee is 
comprised of at least three members, all of whom are NEDs.

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  17

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationStrategic Report continued

Risk management processes
The ERMF sets out the core risk management activities 
undertaken by the Group to ensure that it manages risk 
exposures within risk appetite, to ensure that the Group’s 
desired risk culture is embedded throughout the Group, and 
that the Board understands the Group’s risk profile and adopts 
a clearly defined risk appetite.

The business objectives and strategy adopted by the Board 
determine the nature and scale of the commercial activities 
undertaken by the Group, and the overall risk appetite of the 
Group. As such, the business objectives are the key 
determinant of the Group’s risk profile.

The risk function periodically identifies the various risk 
exposure types of the Group, collectively referred to as the 
risk universe (previously referred to as the risk assessment 
framework). This exercise also covers any emerging risks, 
defined as newly developing and changing risks which could 
have a significant impact on the Group. The risk universe is 
approved by the Board at least once a year, or more frequently 
in the event of a significant change to the Group’s business 
activities or external business environment. 

Risk appetite represents the type and level of risk which the 
Group is willing to accept in pursuit of its objectives and is 
articulated by the Board through the Group’s risk appetite 
statements, at least annually or more often if required. These 
can be expressed in either quantitative or qualitative terms. The 
Group implements these risk appetite statements through the 
adoption of ‘risk limits’ which provide exposure thresholds that 
the business must use to manage the Group’s risk exposure on 
a day-to-day basis. Risk limits are approved by the GTRC on a 
semi-annual basis. In setting its risk appetite, the Group adheres 
to the overriding principle that the risk profile of the Group 
should be managed to as low as reasonably practicable. 

The Group publishes risk management policies which describe 
the principal risk management and control requirements that 
must be implemented to manage the Group’s risk exposure 
within appetite. The GTRC approves the risk management 
policies annually, or more often if needed. 

The Group assesses risk exposure at least twice a year to 
ensure that it is operating within risk appetite. The assessment 
of risk exposure consists of the Risk and Controls Self-
Assessment Process (‘RCSA’); and stress testing and scenario 
analysis. The findings of the RCSA process and the stress and 
scenario analysis are taken together to determine total risk 
exposure, and then compared with the applicable risk appetite 
statement to assess whether the Group is operating within 
risk appetite.

The RCSA is the process by which each subsidiary assesses 
its current exposure to risk, including an assessment of the 
effectiveness of the control framework it has in place. RCSAs 
are performed by business and control functions with support 
from the Risk function. Any impact on the Group’s capital, 
liquidity, reputation, regulatory standing or access to capital 
markets is considered.

The Group undertakes stress tests and scenario analyses to 
complement the RCSA process and enhance its understanding 
of its risk profile and control framework. The Group 
undertakes the following stress tests and scenario analysis 
alongside the RCSA process: macro-economic scenarios to 
investigate the impact on the Group of ‘severe but plausible’ 
external events which are beyond the control of the Group; 
and reverse stress tests to identify those risks which could 
render the Group’s business model unviable in an extreme 
scenario, thereby identifying those areas of the Group’s 
control framework which require particular scrutiny.

The ability of the Group to withstand severe risk events is, to 
a large extent, determined by the level of capital and liquidity 
resources held by the Group. The Group therefore regularly 
assesses the adequacy of its capital and liquidity resources 
to cover the Group’s risk profile as established through the 
RCSA and stress test and scenario process. The assessment 
of financial resources is undertaken at a subsidiary level, to 
ensure that each subsidiary has access to adequate financial 
resources on a standalone basis.

The Group’s risk management policies set out reporting 
requirements for each risk. Day to day monitoring and 
reporting of risk exposures are assigned to specific functions 
or individuals. Risk exposures are reported against the 
relevant risk appetite or risk limit and escalation procedures 
ensure that significant exposures and events are subject to 
senior management review and action. The Group’s Risk 
Management policies also set out reporting requirements 
covering both events which have or might have resulted in a 
material financial or reputational loss to the Group. The GTRC 
reviews reporting requirements at least annually as part of its 
review of the risk management policies.

Principal Risks

The Group’s Risk Assessment Framework categorises the 
risks faced by the Group into nine risk categories: Market 
Risk, Credit Risk, Operational Risk, Strategic and Business Risk, 
Governance Risk, Regulatory, Legal and Human Resources Risk, 
Reputational Risk, Liquidity Risk and other Financial Risks.

Market Risk
Market Risk is the vulnerability of the Group to movements 
in the value of financial instruments. The Group does not take 
trading risk and does not hold proprietary trading positions. 
Consequently, the Group is exposed to Market Risk only in 
relation to incidental positions in financial instruments arising 
as a result of the Group’s failure to match clients’ orders 
precisely. Such positions are valued and measured from 
trade date on a daily mark-to-market basis.

The Group’s risk management policies reduce the likelihood 
of such trade mismatches and, in the event that they arise, 
the Group’s policy is to close out such balances immediately. 
All Market Risk arising across the Group is identified and 
monitored on a daily basis.

18  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

Credit Risk
The Credit Risk faced by the Group consists of counterparty 
credit risk (as opposed to issuer risk), and principally arises 
from the following:

•  pre-settlement risk arising from Matched Principal broking;

•  settlement risk arising from Matched Principal broking;

•  cash deposits held at banks and money market instruments; 

and

•  Name Passing brokerage receivables.

In addition to each individual element of counterparty risk 
identified above, the Group is also exposed to concentration 
risk. This is where the Group becomes overly exposed to these 
credit exposures in the aggregate either to an individual 
counterparty or to a group of linked counterparties.

Pre-settlement risk
Pre-settlement Risk arises in the Matched Principal broking 
business in which Group subsidiaries interpose themselves 
as principal between two (or more) contracting parties to a 
Matched Principal transaction and as a result the Group is at 
risk of loss should one of the parties to a transaction default 
on its obligations prior to settlement date. In the event of 
default, the Group would have to replace the defaulted 
contract in the market. This is a contingent risk in that the 
Group will only suffer loss if the market price of the securities 
has moved adversely to the original trade price.

Counterparty exposures are kept under constant review 
and the Group takes steps to reduce counterparty risk where 
market conditions require. Particular attention is paid to more 
illiquid markets where the price movement is more volatile, 
such as broking in GDR, ADR and emerging markets 
instruments.

The Group is also exposed to short term pre-settlement risk 
where it acts as an executing broker on an exchange, during 
the period between the execution of the trade and the client 
claiming the trade. This exposure is minimal as under the 
terms of the ‘give-up’ agreements the Group has in place 
with its clients, trades must be claimed by the end of trade 
day. Once the trade has been claimed, the Group’s only 
exposure to the client is for the invoiced receivables.

Settlement risk
Settlement Risk is the risk that on settlement date a 
counterparty defaults on its contractual obligation to make 
payment for a securities transaction after the corresponding 
value has been paid away by the Group. Unlike pre-settlement 
risk, the exposure is to the full principal value of the transaction.

In practice the Group is not exposed to this risk as settlement 
is almost invariably effected on a Delivery versus Payment 
basis. Free of payment deliveries (where an immediate 
exposure arises due to the Group’s settling its side of the 
transaction without simultaneous receipt of the counter-
value) occur very infrequently and only under the application 
of stringent controls.

Cash deposits
The Group is exposed to counterparty Credit Risk in respect 
of cash deposits held with financial institutions. The vast 
majority of the Group’s cash deposits are held with highly 
rated clearing banks and settlement organisations (as set out 
in the Credit Risk analysis in Note 25 to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements).

As with trading counterparties, cash deposit counterparty 
exposures and limits are kept under review and steps are taken 
to reduce counterparty risk where market conditions require.

Name Passing brokerage receivables
The majority of transactions brokered by the Group are 
on a Name Passing basis, where the Group acts as agent 
in arranging the trade and is not a counterparty to the 
transaction. Whilst the Group does not suffer any exposure 
in relation to the underlying instrument brokered (given that 
the Group is not a principal to the trade), it is exposed to the 
risk that the client fails to pay the brokerage it is charged.

Receivables arising from Name Passing brokerage are closely 
monitored by senior management.

Concentration risk
The possibility of Concentration Risk exists in the level of 
exposure to counterparties. The Group controls its credit 
exposure to counterparties and groups of linked counterparties 
through the application of a system of counterparty credit 
limits based on the mark-to-market exposure for Matched 
Principal trades, outstanding brokerage receivables for Name 
Passing trades, and amount on deposit for cash deposit 
exposure. Credit departments also monitor exposures across 
country groupings, credit rating, and types of counterparty.

Operational Risk
Operational Risk is the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or 
failed internal processes, people activities, systems or external 
events. Operational Risk covers a wide and diverse range of 
risk types, and the overall objective of the Group’s approach to 
Operational Risk management is not to attempt to avoid all 
potential risks, but to proactively identify and assess risks and 
risk situations in order to manage them in an efficient and 
informed manner. Examples of Operational Risk include:

•  IT systems failures, breakdown in security or loss of 

data integrity;

•  failure or disruption of a critical business process, through 

internal or external error or event;

•  failure or withdrawal of settlement and clearing systems;

•  events preventing access to premises, telecommunications 
failures or loss of power supply which interrupt business 
activities; and

•  broker errors.

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  19

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationStrategic Report continued

Strategic and Business Risk
The Group operates in an environment characterised by 
intense competition, rapid technological change and a 
continually evolving regulatory framework. Failure to adapt to 
changing market dynamics, customer requirements or the way 
OTC markets and their participants are regulated constitutes a 
significant long term risk. The Group has identified four 
principal categories of Strategic and Business Risk:

•  direct regulatory risk;

•  indirect regulatory risk;

•  lower market activity risk; and

•  commercial risk.

Direct regulatory risk
The risk of new regulations imposing a fundamental change 
to the structure or activity of financial markets, resulting in a 
reduced role for IDBs. Specific issues could include an inability 
of the business to provide electronic platforms or market 
facilities which are compliant with new regulations or the 
obligation to hold punitive levels of regulatory capital.

Indirect regulatory risk
The risk of a fundamental change to the commercial 
environment due to the impact on clients of changes to 
their regulatory environment causing significantly reduced 
trade volumes. This could include increased execution and 
clearing costs, onerous collateral requirements or increases 
in regulatory capital requirements, or a prohibition on certain 
types of trading activity.

Lower market activity risk
The risk that the Group experiences a sustained period of low 
market activity leading to reduced revenues. This could arise 
as a result of adverse macro-economic conditions, reduced 
levels of general banking activity, market uncertainty or lack 
of volatility.

Commercial risk
The risk of significant or fundamental changes to the 
commercial or competitive environment, whether due to 
client  requirements or competitor activity.

The markets in which the Group competes are characterised 
by rapidly changing technology, evolving customer demand 
and uses of services, and the potential emergence of new 
industry standards and practices. Such changes may increase 
the risk that the Group faces additional costs or barriers to 
entry to markets that its competitors do not experience. New 
entrants or new methods of delivering broking services may 
gain first mover advantage that the Group may not be able to 
respond to in a timely manner.

The Group competes with other interdealer brokers for 
staff. The costs of employing front office broking staff is 
currently the largest cost faced by the Group. The effect of 
the competition for broking staff can result in an increase in 
staff costs, or if staff leave the Group, can result in the loss 
of capability, customer relationships and expertise.

Consolidation within the industry or integration with 
adjacent sectors may provide competing firms or platforms 
with advantages of scale, access to wider pools of liquidity, 
or service capability that may put the Group at a competitive 
disadvantage.

The Group seeks to manage and mitigate its commercial risk 
by following a clearly defined business development strategy, 
geographic and product diversification and strong client 
relationship management.

Commercial risk also includes the risk that the Group is unable 
to respond to market demand for electronic broking solutions 
and loses market share as a result. The Group seeks to address 
this risk through continued development and enhancement of 
its electronic broking capability, to ensure that it can offer a 
competitive solution for all major asset classes.

Governance Risk
Governance Risk is the risk of loss or damage to the business 
arising as a result of a failure of management structures or 
processes. This includes failure to adhere to applicable corporate 
governance requirements (such as those recommended by the 
UK Corporate Governance Code), a failure to ensure adequate 
succession to key management positions, or the inappropriate 
use of authority and influence by current or former senior 
members of staff.

The risk of accounting error or fraud is mitigated by the 
strong control environment which exists within the Group, 
in particular the involvement of the Audit Committee, the 
Internal Audit function and the GTRC. Succession planning 
within the Group is overseen by the Board.

Regulatory, Legal and Human Resource Risk
This risk concerns the potential loss of value due to regulatory 
enforcement action (such as for breaches of conduct of business 
requirements or market abuse provisions); the possible costs and 
penalties associated with litigation; and the possibility of a failure 
to retain and motivate key members of staff. The Group also 
faces the risk that changes in applicable laws and regulations 
could have a serious adverse impact on the business.

The Group’s lead regulator is the FCA, but the Group is also 
subject to the requirements imposed by the regulatory 
framework of the other jurisdictions in which the Group 
operates. The Group’s compliance officers monitor compliance 
with applicable regulations and report regularly to the Board. 
The Group’s Legal department oversees contracts entered into 
by Group companies, and manages litigation which arises from 
time to time.

Reputational Risk
Reputational Risk is the risk that the Group’s ability to do 
business might be damaged as a result of its reputation being 
tarnished. Clients rely on the Group’s integrity and probity. 
The Group has policies and procedures in place to manage this 
risk to the extent possible, which include conduct of business 
rules, procedures for employee hiring and the taking on of 
new business.

20  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

Liquidity Risk
The Group seeks to ensure that it has access to an appropriate 
level of cash, other forms of marketable securities and 
facilities to enable it to finance its ongoing operations on cost 
effective terms. Cash and cash equivalent balances are held 
with the primary objective of capital security and availability, 
with a secondary objective of generating returns. Funding 
requirements are monitored by the GTRC.

As a normal part of its operations, the Group faces liquidity 
risk through the risk of being required to fund transactions that 
fail to settle on the due date. From a risk perspective, the most 
problematic scenario concerns ‘fail to deliver’ transactions, 
where the business has received a security from the selling 
counterparty (and has paid cash in settlement of the same) but 
is unable to effect onward delivery of the security to the buying 
counterparty. Such settlement ‘fails’ give rise to a funding 
requirement, namely the cost of funding the security which 
we have ‘failed to deliver’ until such time as the delivery leg is 
finally settled and we have received the associated cash.

The Group has addressed this funding risk by arranging 
overdraft facilities to cover any ‘failed to deliver’ trades, 
either with the relevant settlement agent/depository or 
with a clearing bank. Under such arrangements, the facility 
provider will fund the value of any ‘failed to deliver’ trades 
until delivery of the security is effected. Certain facility 
providers require collateral (such as a cash deposit or parent 
company guarantee) to protect them from any adverse 
mark-to-market movement and some also charge a funding 
fee for providing the facility.

The Group is also exposed to potential margin calls from 
clearing houses and correspondent clearers, both in the UK 
and the United States.

In the event of a liquidity issue arising, the firm has recourse 
to existing global cash resources, after which it could draw 
down on a £150m committed revolving credit line as 
additional contingency funding. This facility remained 
undrawn throughout 2014.

Further details of the Group’s borrowings and cash are 
provided in Notes 22, 25 and 31 to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements.

Other Financial Risks
The nature and scope of the Group’s operations mean that 
it is exposed to a number of other financial risks including 
interest rate risk, currency risk, taxation risks, and pension 
obligation risk.

Interest rate risk
The Group is exposed to interest rate risk on its cash deposits 
and on borrowings under bank facilities. The Group’s Sterling 
Notes carry interest at fixed rates. Cash deposits are typically 
held at maturities of less than three months.

The GTRC periodically considers the Group’s exposure to 
interest rate volatility.

Analysis of the Group’s sensitivity to movements in interest rates 
is set out in Note 25 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Currency risk
The Group trades in a number of currencies around the 
world, but reports its results in Sterling. The Group therefore 
has translation exposure to foreign currency exchange rate 
movements in these currencies, principally the US dollar 
and the Euro, and transaction exposure within individual 
operations which undertake transactions in one currency 
and report in another.

Analysis of the Group’s sensitivity to movements in foreign 
currency exchange rates is set out in Note 25 to the 
Consolidated Financial Statements.

Taxation risk
The risk of financial loss or misstatement as a result of 
non-compliance with regulations relating to direct, indirect or 
employee taxation. The Group employs experienced qualified 
staff in key jurisdictions to manage this risk and in addition 
uses professional advisers, as appropriate.

Pension obligation risk
The risk that the Group is required, in the short and medium term, 
to fund a deficit in the Group’s defined benefit pension scheme.

Corporate Social Responsibility

Governance
The Company continues its commitment to behave ethically 
and contribute to economic development while improving the 
quality of life of its workforce, as well as society at large.

The responsibility for social, ethical and environmental 
matters rests with the Board, and is included in its Terms 
of Reference. The Chief Executive is the Board member 
responsible for Corporate and Social Responsibility (‘CSR’). 
The Company’s CSR Governance Committee was established 
in 2009 and comprises all members of the Company’s Executive 
Committee. This Committee and its members in their executive 
roles continue to oversee and guide the CSR activities of the 
Company, reflecting the importance the Company places on 
this broad and visible area of responsibility.

Business ethics
The Board expects the Company to maintain high standards of 
governance and of ethical behaviour throughout the business, 
and policies and procedures exist to ensure employees at all 
levels maintain the standards that are set and which are 
expected of them. 

The Company has a clear set of values namely Honesty, 
Integrity, Respect and Excellence. These together form the 
foundation of how the Company conducts its business, 
informing the principles under which the Company operates 
and the standards of behaviour that are required of all 
members of staff. 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  21

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationStrategic Report continued

The Company’s approach to ethical behaviour and corporate 
governance is documented in its policies and procedures, for 
observance by all members of staff, and provides for:

•  maintaining high standards of compliance and risk 
management – ultimately the responsibility of the 
Chief Executive, and monitored by the Board and 
Audit Committee;

•  fully complying with legal and regulatory requirements in 
each of the jurisdictions in which it operates, including the 
FCA’s Conduct of Business Sourcebook and the Bank of 
England’s Non-Investment Products Code;

•  prohibiting corrupt practices such as inappropriate 
payments to any third party, directly or indirectly;

•  fully complying with tax laws in each of the jurisdictions in 
which it operates relating to its affairs and the deduction of 
taxes from staff remuneration;

•  trading fairly, knowing its clients and properly 

understanding its trades with its clients. The Company 
has a policy of not participating in trading activities which 
it suspects may not be for legitimate trading purposes, 
or whose sole purpose appears to be tax reduction by 
the counterparty;

•  guiding employees involved in procurement activities, 

including a requirement to adhere to the highest ethical and 
social standards; and

•  maintaining appropriate guidelines on gifts, hospitality, 

entertainment and conflicts of interest.

In formulating its policies, the Group has due regard to human 
rights considerations.

Employees
Attracting and retaining the best brokers, management, 
professional and other support staff remains crucial to the 
Company’s ongoing success and management recognises that 
the Company’s ability to maximise returns to shareholders is 
dependent on employing and retaining the best staff in all the 
geographies in which it operates. The Company is committed 
to developing and motivating its staff and offers training 
where appropriate and measures performance to achieve 
this objective.

In 2014, the Company invested in a new intranet to further 
assist with employee engagement. The Company maintains 
effective internal communications channels at both Group 
and regional levels to ensure staff are informed in a timely 
way about major developments in the business, such as 
and financial and regulatory announcements, our culture, 
organisational changes, launch of new products and key 
hires. Information is provided to employees regularly via 
the Company’s intranet site, desktops, poster sites, print 
collateral and town hall meetings, as appropriate. 

22  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

Staff welfare remains a serious matter for the Company, 
especially given the demanding nature of the broking 
environment. The great majority of Tullett Prebon employees 
work in an office environment and therefore there are no 
significant areas of risk to report. Overall responsibility for 
staff welfare and the management of stress rests with 
business line management assisted by the Human Resources 
department. This is supplemented by an Employee Assistance 
Programme which provides counselling and advice to staff 
and their families, and the use of occupational health 
specialists if required. The Company’s policies on health 
and safety provide a formal framework and inform line 
management in the discharge of their responsibilities 
in this area. 

Equal opportunities
Tullett Prebon is committed to attracting, retaining developing 
and advancing the most qualified persons without regard to 
their race, ethnicity, religion or belief, gender, age, sexual 
orientation or disability. This commitment is underpinned by 
policies on equal opportunities, harassment and discrimination, 
to which all employees are required to adhere.

In the event that an employee becomes disabled, the 
Group’s policy is to make reasonable adjustments, including 
arranging training, to enable the employee to continue 
working for the Group.

At 31 December 2014 the Company’s Board comprised one 
woman and six men; the senior managers of the Company 
(excluding the Board) comprised two women and 49 men; 
and the Group employed 522 women and 2,090 men.

Key performance indicators
Records on employment matters are maintained as required 
in each legal and regulatory jurisdiction. Key performance 
indicators are as follows:

•  The Company employed 2,536 full time equivalent 

employees and Directors worldwide in 2014 (47% in Europe, 
31% in the Americas and 22% in Asia Pacific) compared with 
2,603 staff in 2013 (47% in Europe, 31% in the Americas and 
22% in Asia Pacific). Total remuneration for all staff in 2014 
excluding payments made under the cost improvement 
programme was £409m (2013: £483m); and

•  The table below sets out the retention levels across 

the Group:

EMEA

5 years’ + service 

10 years’ + service 

Americas

5 years’ + service 

10 years’ + service

Asia Pacific

5 years’ + service 

10 years’ + service 

2014

24% 

36%

17%

33%

30%

20%

Social and community issues
Tax and other social payments
The Company continues to maintain a Low Risk rating from 
HMRC. The Company has earned this Low Risk rating in each 
of the last seven years since HMRC started to disclose the 
names of those companies achieving this important status.

Tullett Prebon is registered, regulated and publicly listed in the 
UK and will continue to pay the right amount of tax at the 
right time.

Tullett Prebon made payments to tax authorities in the UK 
and the United States (the main jurisdictions in which it 
operates) for 2014 of £189m (2013: £235m), comprising 
corporation tax, premises taxes, employer’s social security 
payments, income taxes and social security paid on behalf 
of  employees and VAT/ sales taxes. In addition, the Company 
makes further tax payments to the tax authorities in other 
tax jurisdictions in which it operates.

HM Treasury has transposed the requirements set out under 
CRD IV and issued the Capital Requirements Country-by-
Country Reporting Regulations 2013, effective 1 January 2014. 
The legislation requires Tullett Prebon plc to publish additional 
information, in respect of the year ended 31 December 2014, 
by 31 December 2015. This information will be available by 
this date on Tullett Prebon’s website, www.tullettprebon.com.

Donations
The Company has maintained the policy of making no 
donations to political parties. Similarly, charitable donations 
are not normally allowed. These two policies reflect the 
Board’s view that shareholders’ funds should be retained for 
use within the business and that it is for shareholders to 
determine what non-business use should be made of their 
resources.

Environment
Tullett Prebon, as an office-based business, is not engaged 
in activities that are generally regarded as having a high 
environmental impact. However, the Board has agreed that it 
will seek to adopt policies to safeguard the environment to 
meet statutory requirements or where such policies are 
commercially sensible.

The emission of greenhouse gases as a result of office-based 
business activities and from business travel is the Company’s 
main impact on the environment and statistics relating to 
these emissions are set out in the Directors’ Report.

The Company also measures its annual carbon footprint. 
Details of which can be found in the Directors’ Report.

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  23

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationBoard of Directors

Rupert Robson (54)

Roger Perkin (66)

Chairman
Rupert Robson was appointed to the Board in January 2007 
and as Chairman on 6 March 2013. He is Chairman of the 
Nominations Committee. He has held a number of senior 
roles in financial institutions, most recently Non-executive 
Director of London Metal Exchange Holdings Ltd and Non-
executive Director of OJSC Nomos Bank, Global Head, Financial 
Institutions Group, Corporate Investment Banking and Markets 
at HSBC and Head of European Insurance, Investment Banking 
at Citigroup Global Markets. He is Chairman of Charles Taylor 
plc and EMF Capital Partners and was appointed as Chairman 
of Sanne Holdings Ltd with effect from 1 March 2015.

John Phizackerley (53) 

Chief Executive
John Phizackerley was appointed to the Board and as Chief 
Executive in September 2014. From 1986 to 2009 he held various 
positions in Lehman Brothers including Head of Equity Research, 
Head of Equity Sales in Europe, Global Head of Pan-European 
Cash Equities, Co-Head of European Equities and Chief 
Administrative Officer, Europe and Middle East. He remained 
with the firm post the Nomura acquisition in 2009 and held a 
number of positions, including Chief Operating Officer of 
Nomura International and Chief Executive Officer of Nomura 
Bank International, becoming Chief Executive Officer of Nomura 
International plc in 2011. He is also Chairman of the Barts and the 
London NHS Trust External Advisory Board since 2013.

Independent Non-executive Director
Roger Perkin joined the Board on 1 July 2012. He is Chairman 
of the Audit Committee and a member of the Remuneration 
and Nominations Committees. He is a former partner at Ernst 
& Young LLP and spent 40 years in the accounting profession 
before retiring from the firm in 2009. He is a Non-executive 
Director and Chairman of the Audit Committee for Nationwide 
Building Society and Electra Private Equity plc and Non-
executive Director and member of the Audit Committee of 
Friends Life Group Limited. He was formerly a Non-executive 
Director at The Evolution Group plc until its acquisition in 
December 2011. He is a trustee of two charities, Chiddingstone 
Castle and Crime Reduction Initiatives.

Stephen Pull (58)

Independent Non-executive Director
Stephen Pull was appointed as a Non-executive Director of 
Tullett Prebon plc in September 2011. He is Chairman of the 
Remuneration Committee and a member of the Audit and 
Nominations Committees. Stephen Pull was Chairman of 
Corporate Broking at Nomura between 2008 and 2011 following 
their acquisition of Lehman Brothers Europe for whom Stephen 
worked from 2002 as Head of Corporate Broking, and then as 
Chairman of Corporate Broking. He has also held a number of 
other senior roles in the City, including Managing Director of 
Corporate Broking at Merrill Lynch and Head of UK Equity Sales 
at Barclays de Zoete Wedd.

Paul Mainwaring (51)

David Shalders (48)

Independent Non-executive Director
David Shalders joined the Board on 27 February 2014 and is 
a member of the Remuneration Committee. David Shalders 
is Group Operations & Technology Director at Willis Group 
Holdings plc, responsible for information technology, 
operations, real estate and change management functions. 
David Shalders joined Willis from the Royal Bank of Scotland 
Group where he served for over a decade in senior operations 
and IT roles, most recently as Global Chief Operating Officer for 
Global Banking and Markets. He also led the division’s 
regulatory response to Basel 3. Prior to that, David led the 
Group’s integration with ABN Amro and held roles as Head of 
London and Asia Operations and Head of Derivative Operations 
for NatWest.

Finance Director
Paul Mainwaring qualified as a chartered accountant with 
Price Waterhouse in 1987, and obtained an MBA from Cranfield 
School of Management in 1991. From 1993 to 2000, he worked 
for Caradon plc in a number of financial roles, including three years 
as Finance Director of MK Electric. In 2000, he was appointed as 
Group Finance Director of TDG plc. He was appointed as Group 
Finance Director of Mowlem plc in 2005. He was appointed to the 
Collins Stewart Tullett plc Board in October 2006, and has been 
Finance Director of Tullett Prebon plc since December 2006.

Angela Knight (64)

Senior Independent Non-executive Director
Angela Knight was appointed as a Non-executive Director 
of Tullett Prebon plc in September 2011. She is a member of 
the Audit, Remuneration and Nominations Committees. Angela 
Knight is the Senior Independent Director on Brewin Dolphin Plc 
and a Non-executive Director of Transport for London. She was 
formerly the Chief Executive of Energy UK until 31 December 2014, 
the Chief Executive of the British Bankers’ Association from 2007 to 
2012 and the Chief Executive of the Association of Private Client 
Investment Managers and Stockbrokers from 1997 to 2006. She 
was also formerly the Member of Parliament for Erewash from 
1992 to 1997, serving as a Treasury Minister from 1995 to 1997. 
Her previous Non-executive Director appointments include the 
Financial Skills Partnership, Lloyds TSB plc, Scottish Widows and 
LogicaCMG plc.

24  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

Directors’ Report

The Directors present their report, together with the audited 
financial statements of the Company and its subsidiaries for 
the year ended 31 December 2014.

Results and dividends
The results for the year are set out in the Consolidated Income 
Statement on page 55.

The voting rights of the ordinary shares held by the Tullett 
Prebon plc Employee Benefit Trust 2007 are exercisable by 
the trustees in accordance with their fiduciary duties. The 
right to receive dividends on these shares has been waived. 
Details of employee share schemes are set out in Note 28 to 
the Consolidated Financial Statements which is incorporated 
into this Directors’ Report by reference.

The Directors recommend a final dividend for the year of 
11.25p per ordinary share. The final dividend, if approved, 
will be paid on 14 May 2015 to ordinary shareholders 
whose names are on the register at the close of business 
on 24 April 2015.

During 2014 Tullett Prebon plc paid a final dividend for 2013 
of 11.25p per ordinary share and an interim dividend for 2014 
of 5.6p per ordinary share.

Directors
The Directors who served throughout the year, except as 
noted, were as follows:

Rupert Robson (Non-executive Chairman)

John Phizackerley (Chief Executive – appointed 1 September 2014)

Paul Mainwaring (Finance Director)

Angela Knight (Senior Independent Non-executive Director)

Roger Perkin (independent Non-executive Director) 

Stephen Pull (independent Non-executive Director)

David Shalders (independent Non-executive Director – 
appointed 27 February 2014)

Terry Smith (Chief Executive – retired on 31 August 2014)

Biographical details of the Directors are set out on page 24.

The Company has made qualifying third party indemnity 
provisions for the benefit of its Directors which remain in 
place at the date of this report. The principal employer of 
the Tullett Prebon Pension Scheme has given indemnities to 
trustees of that scheme, including the Executive Directors and 
Chairman. The Company maintains liability insurance for its 
Directors and officers.

Share capital and control
Following the acquisition of PVM Oil Associates Limited on 
26 November 2014 the share capital increased by 25,776,523 
to 243,516,227. Details of the issued share capital, together 
with details of the movements in the Company’s issued 
share capital during the year, are shown in Note 26 to the 
Consolidated Financial Statements which is incorporated 
into this Directors’ Report by reference.

The Company has one class of ordinary shares, which carry no 
right to fixed income. Each share carries the right to one vote 
at general meetings of the Company.

No person has any special rights of control over the Company’s 
share capital and all issued shares are fully paid.

There are no specific restrictions on the size of a holding 
nor on the transfer of shares, which are both governed by 
the provisions of the Company’s Articles of Association (the 
‘Articles’) and prevailing legislation. The Directors are not 
aware of any agreements between holders of the Company’s 
shares that may result in restrictions on the transfer of 
securities or on voting rights, nor are there any arrangements 
by which, with the Company’s co-operation, financial rights 
carried by securities are held by a person other than the holder 
of those securities.

With regard to the appointment and replacement of 
Directors, the Company is governed by its Articles, the UK 
Corporate Governance Code, the Companies Act 2006 and 
related legislation. The Articles may be amended by special 
resolution of the shareholders and were last amended at 
the Company’s Annual General Meeting in May 2012. As 
a consequence of this amendment to the Articles, at each 
AGM all of the Directors who held office on the date seven 
days before the Notice of that AGM must retire from office 
and each Director wishing to serve again must submit 
themselves for election or re-election by shareholders.

The powers of the Directors include the authorities to allot 
shares and to buy the Company’s shares in the market as 
granted by shareholders at the AGM. At the last AGM 
resolutions were passed to authorise the Directors to allot 
up to a nominal amount of £36,289,950 ordinary shares 
(subject to certain restrictions) and to purchase up to 
21,773,970 ordinary shares. Details of the shares issued 
during the year and up to the date of this Annual Report are 
set out in Note 26 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. 
At the date of this Annual Report, no shares had been 
purchased in the market under the authority granted at the 
2014 AGM. The allotment and buy-back authorities will expire 
at the conclusion of the next AGM or, if earlier, on 1 July 2015, 
unless renewed before that time.

Further powers of the Directors are described in the Schedule 
of Matters Reserved for the Board, which is available on the 
Company’s website, and summarised in the Corporate 
Governance Report.

The Company’s £150m revolving credit facility gives the lenders 
the right not to renew loans and to cancel commitments in the 
event of a change of control. The facility has never been drawn. 
There are no other significant agreements that take effect, alter 
or terminate upon a change of control of the Company, nor any 
agreements with the Company and its employees or Directors 
for compensation for loss of office or employment that occurs 
because of a take-over bid.

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  25

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationDirectors’ Report continued

Substantial interests
As at the year end, and at 2 March 2015, being the latest 
practicable date before signing of this document, the 
following (not being Directors, their families or persons 
connected, within section 252 of the Companies Act 2006) 
had notified the Company in accordance with DTR 5 that they 
were interested in the following voting rights of the issued 
ordinary share capital of the Company:

Schroders plc

Jupiter Asset Management

Oppenheimer Funds, Inc

Allianz Global Investors Europe GmbH

Majedie Asset Management

Invesco Limited

Aberdeen Asset Managers

Henderson Global Investors

Terry Smith

31 December
 2014 %

 2 March
 2015 %

12.73

13.02

7.66

4.94 

4.59

4.50

4.47

4.42

4.30

3.96

7.66

5.01

4.59

4.50

4.47

4.42

4.30

3.96

Corporate Governance Report
A separate Corporate Governance Report is included 
within this Annual Report on pages 28 to 34 and which is, 
where relevant, incorporated into this Directors’ Report by 
reference. The Corporate Governance Report includes the 
information that fulfils the requirements of section 7 of The 
Disclosure and Transparency Rules with the exception of the 
information referred to in DTR 7.2.6 which is included in this 
Directors’ Report.

Corporate Social Responsibility
Information concerning the Company’s policies on employee 
engagement and the employment of disabled staff is included 
in the Corporate Social Responsibility section of the Strategic 
Report, which is, where relevant, incorporated into this 
Directors’ Report by reference.

Greenhouse gas emissions
The estimated 2014 Group greenhouse gas emissions are set 
out below:

Combustion of fuel, vehicles,  
fugitive emissions (scope 1)

Purchased electricity (scope 2)

Total

Total emissions per employee

Tonnes 
of CO2e

794

10,810

11,604

4.3

The emission statistics were calculated by Sustain Limited 
and cover all material sources of emissions for which the 
Group is responsible. The methodology used was that of 
the ‘Greenhouse Gas Protocol: A Corporate Accounting and 
Reporting Standard’ (revised edition, 2004). Responsibility 
for emissions sources was determined using the operational 
control approach. The estimate covers all Tullett Prebon 
operations that are consolidated in the financial statements. 
Data was collected for the Group’s largest offices which 
employ approximately 80% of the Group’s staff, and 
extrapolated to cover all the Group’s offices, as well as for 
the Group’s disaster recovery sites and any corporate vehicles. 
Collected data was converted to greenhouse gas estimates 
using the UK Government’s GHG Conversion Factors for 
Company Reporting 2014.

Political and charitable donations
It is the Company’s policy not to make cash contributions to 
any political party. However, within the normal activities of 
the Group there may be occasions when an activity might 
fall within the broader definition of “political expenditure” 
contained within the Companies Act 2006. During 2014 no 
political or charitable donations were made by the Group 
(2013: £nil).

Going concern
The Group’s business activities and performance, and the 
financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position, 
borrowing facilities and hedging strategy, together with the 
factors likely to affect its future development, performance 
and position, are explained in the Strategic Report. Analysis of 
the Group’s key risks and approach to risk management is also 
set out in the Strategic Report. Details of the Group’s interest 
bearing loans and borrowings, long term provisions, other long 
term payables and financial instruments are set out in Notes 22 
to 25 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

The Group has considerable financial resources both in the 
regions and at the corporate centre comfortably to meet the 
Group’s ongoing obligations.

After making enquiries, the Directors have a reasonable 
expectation that the Company and the Group have adequate 
resources to continue in operational existence for the 
foreseeable future. Accordingly, the Annual Report and financial 
statements continue to be prepared on the going concern basis.

Accountability and audit 
The Directors’ statement regarding their responsibility for 
preparing the Annual Report is set out on page 49 and the 
independent auditor’s report regarding their reporting 
responsibility is on pages 50 to 54.

26  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

Auditor
Deloitte LLP have expressed their willingness to continue in 
office as auditor and a resolution to re-appoint them will be 
proposed at the forthcoming AGM.

Disclosure of information to the auditor
Each of the persons who is a Director at the date of approval 
of this Annual Report confirms that:

•  so far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit 
information of which the Company’s auditor is unaware; 
and

•  the Director has taken all the steps that he ought to have 
taken as a Director in order to make himself aware of any 
relevant audit information and to establish that the 
Company’s auditor is aware of that information.

This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in 
accordance with the provisions of section 418 of the 
Companies Act 2006.

Annual General Meeting 
The AGM of the Company will be held at 2.00pm on 6 May 
2015. Details of the resolutions to be proposed at the AGM are 
set out in a separate Notice of Meeting which will be sent to all 
shareholders entitled to receive such Notice. Only members on 
the register of members of the Company as at 6.00pm on Friday 
1 May 2015 (or two days before any adjourned meeting) will be 
entitled to attend and vote at the AGM. Any proxy must be 
lodged with the Company’s registrars or submitted to CREST at 
least 48 hours before the AGM or any adjourned meeting.

Resolutions dealing with the authority to allot shares, 
disapplication of pre-emption rights, authority to buy back 
shares and to convene extraordinary general meetings on no 
less than fourteen days’ notice will be put to the AGM as special 
business. The resolutions are set out in a Notice of Annual 
General Meeting together with explanatory notes which are set 
out in a separate circular to shareholders which accompanies 
this Annual Report.

By order of the Board

Tiffany Brill
Company Secretary
3 March 2015

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  27

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
Corporate Governance Report

The Directors, whose names and details are set out on 
page 24 and 25, are responsible for the corporate governance 
of the Group. They are committed to ensuring that from 
the top downwards the highest standards of corporate 
governance are maintained. They support the principles of 
good corporate governance and code of best practice laid 
down in the UK Corporate Governance Code issued by the 
Financial Reporting Council in September 2012 (the ‘Code’), 
which is publicly available at www.frc.org.uk. Throughout 
the year ended 31 December 2014 the Board believes it has 
complied with the principles and provisions recommended 
by the Code. 

More detail covering all aspects of our corporate governance 
is set out in the following pages with a view to giving a 
rounded and comprehensive picture of how the Board sets the 
tone and the framework necessary to achieve the Company’s 
strategic objectives whilst at the same time managing the 
accompanying risks.

Rupert Robson
Chairman
3 March 2015

Chairman’s Statement

Dear Shareholder 

2014 has been a year of considerable change for the Company. 
We completed our largest acquisition in many years, PVM. 
We are delighted with its progress to date. More broadly, 
though, we initiated an in-depth strategic review with outside 
consultants and we will be working through the outcome of 
that exercise in the coming weeks and months. 

The amount of change has been significant at Board level 
too. Terry Smith, our previous Chief Executive, retired at the 
end of August 2014 and John Phizackerley succeeded him as 
Chief Executive from the beginning of September. Phiz has 
made an excellent start and he is leading the strategic review 
mentioned above. With the continuing rapid and substantial 
change experienced in a number of the facets of our business, 
for example technological, regulatory and client-base, it is 
already proving hugely helpful to look at our business from 
the ground up.

As a Board and through the Nominations Committee, we 
spend considerable time on considering the right balance of 
skills, experience and diversity on the Board. The range of 
expertise and backgrounds that we have encompasses, 
in no particular order, markets, conduct and compliance, 
technological, international, accounting, management 
and commercial. 

David Shalders joined the Board on 27 February 2014 and has 
contributed significantly throughout the last 12 months. His 
background in technology and regulation has been valuable to 
our thinking.

Three important areas in which we have already made recent 
changes are risk management, conduct and compliance. The 
process of change and upgrading of these areas continues. In 
order to embed and ensure the success of our efforts, we have 
decided to create a new Risk Committee of the board. We are 
currently engaged in recruiting a new Non-executive Director 
of the Company who will also be Chairman of this Risk 
Committee as well as acting as Non-executive Chairman of 
the Company’s UK regulated entities and their risk 
committees. 

To ensure the success of all these developments requires 
that the Company has a culture of openness, honesty and 
transparency. This culture must, and does, come from the top, 
from the Board, and is rooted in the highest standards of 
corporate governance. 

28  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
Directors

Composition of the Board
The Board currently comprises two Executive Directors, 
four independent Non-executive Directors and a Non-
executive Chairman.

There were several Board changes during 2014. David Shalders 
was appointed as an independent Non-executive Director on 
27 February 2014, Terry Smith retired as Chief Executive with 
effect from 31 August 2014 and John Phizackerley was 
appointed as Chief Executive on 1 September 2014.

The Chairman, Rupert Robson, was, at appointment, 
independent of the Company and the management, but, as 
Chairman, is not classified as independent under the Code. His 
other significant commitments are noted in his biography on 
page 24.

The Directors’ biographies on page 24 demonstrate the 
Board’s depth and breadth of experience and skill. Five of 
the Directors (including four of the Non-executive Directors) 
have extensive previous experience at senior levels in the 
financial services sector. Two of the Directors are chartered 
accountants (one of who was an audit partner in a major firm 
of accountants). The Finance Director was previously Finance 
Director of a number of other companies.

There is a clearly defined and documented division of 
responsibilities between the Chairman and the Chief 
Executive that is reviewed annually. The primary responsibility 
of the Chairman is the leadership of the Board. The primary 
responsibility of the Chief Executive is the running of the 
Company’s operations, maintaining effective management 
and the development and implementation of strategy in order 
to maximise shareholder value.

The Board allows the Executive Directors to take up 
appointments with other companies on the proviso that the 
time commitment involved is not too onerous and would not 
conflict with their duties to the Company.

The terms of the Directors’ service agreements and letters 
of appointment are summarised in the Report on Directors’ 
Remuneration. The service agreements and the letters of 
appointment will be available for inspection during normal 
business hours on any weekday (other than public holidays) 
at the Company’s registered office, and at the AGM from 
fifteen minutes prior to the meeting until its conclusion.

Independence of Directors
The Board has determined that all of the Non-executive 
Directors are independent. The Senior Independent Non- 
executive Director has responsibility for dealing with any 
shareholders who have concerns which contact through the 
normal channels of Chairman, Chief Executive or Finance 
Director has failed to resolve, or for which such contact is 
inappropriate. The Senior Independent Non-executive Director 
provides a sounding board for the Chairman and is available to 
act as an intermediary for other Directors when necessary.

Induction, professional development and 
corporate awareness
All Directors receive an induction to the Company on joining 
the Board and relevant training is available to Directors to 
assist them in the performance of their duties. The Chairman 
is responsible for ensuring that Directors continually update 
their skills and knowledge and familiarity with the Company 
required to fulfil their role on the Board and its Committees. 
The Audit and Remuneration Committees receive briefings 
on current developments. The Non-executive Directors take 
advantage of sector and general conferences and seminars 
and training events organised by professional firms and 
receive circulars and training materials from the Company 
and other professional advisers. Presentations are made to 
the Board by members of the Company’s Executive Committee 
and arrangements are made for Non-executive Directors to 
meet members of the management teams.

Non-executive Directors periodically visit the Company’s 
international offices, usually in connection with other 
activities. The Board is kept informed of any material 
shareholder correspondence, brokers’ reports on the Company 
and sector, institutional voting agency recommendations and 
documents reflecting current shareholder thinking.

Conflicts of interest 
The Company’s Articles of Association permit the Board 
to consider and, if it sees fit, to authorise situations where 
a Director has an interest that conflicts, or may possibly 
conflict, with the interests of the Company (a ‘Relevant 
Situation’). The  Board has a formal system in place for 
Directors to declare Relevant Situations to be considered 
for authorisation by those Directors who have no interest 
in the matter being considered. In deciding whether to 
authorise a Relevant Situation, the non-conflicted Directors 
must act in the way they consider, in good faith, would be 
most likely to promote the success of the Company, and they 
may impose limits or conditions when giving the authorisation 
or subsequently if they think this is appropriate. The Board 
has followed the prescribed procedures in deciding whether, 
and on what terms, to authorise Relevant Situations and 
believes that the systems it has in place for reporting and 
considering Relevant Situations, including an annual review 
of authorisations, continue to operate effectively. During 
the year the independent Non-executive Directors, led by 
the Senior Independent Non-executive Director, reviewed 
the external business commitments of members of the 
Board and concluded that none of these gave rise to conflicts 
of interest or other factors which might affect the effective 
operation of the Company or the Board.

Performance evaluation
Reviews of the effectiveness of the Board and its Committees 
and the performance of individual Directors were undertaken 
in 2014. The effectiveness of the Board was reviewed internally 
by way of an on-line questionnaire using Evalu8. The outcomes 
of the questionnaire were discussed at a Board meeting and 
follow up actions proposed. The review of the Board’s 
effectiveness concluded that the Board was operating effectively. 
The effectiveness of the Board’s Committees was also undertaken 
using Evalu8 and similarly concluded that the Board’s Committees 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  29

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationCorporate Governance Report continued

•  the approval of the prosecution or settlement of all 

litigation which is material to the interests of the Group;

•  reporting to shareholders; and

•  environmental, social and governance policies, including 

corporate social responsibility policy.

Beneath the Board there is a structure of delegated authority 
which sets out the authority levels allocated to the individual 
Directors and senior management.

The Board has established Audit, Remuneration and 
Nominations Committees to which it has delegated some of 
its responsibilities. Each of the Committees has detailed terms 
of reference, which can be viewed on the Company’s website 
and a schedule of business to be transacted during the year. 
The terms of reference of the Audit Committee were amended 
in January 2014 to take account of additional responsibilities 
introduced by the UK Government’s new reporting 
requirements. The responsibilities of the Nominations and 
Audit Committees together with an overview of their work 
during the year are described below. A separate report for the 
Remuneration Committee is set out on pages 35 to 48.

The Board and its Committees are provided with appropriate 
information on a timely basis to enable them to discharge 
their duties. All Directors receive written reports prior to each 
meeting which enable them to make an informed decision on 
corporate and business issues under review.

All Board meetings are minuted and any unresolved concerns 
are recorded in such minutes.

The Group has a comprehensive system for financial reporting 
which is subject to review by both internal and external audit. 
Budgets, regular re-forecasts and monthly management 
accounts including KPIs, income statements, balance sheets 
and cash flows are prepared at all levels of the business and 
consolidated reports are reviewed by the Board.

The Board has a schedule of eight meetings each year to 
discuss the Group’s ordinary course of business. Every effort 
is made to arrange these meetings so that all Directors can 
attend; additional meetings are arranged as required.

The table below sets out the Board and Committee 
attendance record during the year.

All Directors have access to the services of the Company 
Secretary and there are procedures in place for taking 
independent professional advice at the Company’s expense 
if required.

The Company Secretary is responsible for ensuring that the 
Board keeps up to date with key changes in legislation which 
affect the Company. The appointment or removal of the 
Company Secretary is a matter reserved for the Board. 

were operating effectively. Last year an independent facilitator, 
Lygon Group was used and it is the Company’s intention to have 
a further external review in 2016.

Performance evaluations of individual Directors were 
also undertaken which considered the effectiveness and 
commitment of the individual Directors and the need for 
any training or development. In January 2015 the Chairman 
formally met the Non-executive Directors without the 
Executive Directors being present to evaluate the performance 
of the individual Executive Directors. The Senior Independent 
Non-executive Director and the other Non-executive Directors 
met without the Chairman being present to evaluate the 
Chairman’s performance, having first obtained feedback from 
the Executive Directors. Appropriate feedback was provided 
following these meetings. The Chairman has also provided 
feedback on performance to the Non-executive Directors.

Election or re-election at the AGM
At the 2012 AGM, amendments to the Company’s Articles 
with regard to re-election of Directors were approved in order 
to align them with the recommendations set out in the Code. 
Consequently, the Articles require that, at each AGM of the 
Company, all Directors must retire from office and each 
Director wishing to serve again must submit themselves 
for election or re-election by shareholders.

Details of those Directors who are submitting themselves for 
election or re-election at this year’s AGM are set out in the 
separate notice of meeting.

John Phizackerley was appointed since the last AGM and 
accordingly is subject to election at the forthcoming AGM. 
The Board believes that John Phizackerley brings extensive 
expertise in major financial institutions to the Company, 
which will enable him to make a valuable contribution to 
the Company, given the significant changes which the IDB 
industry continues to undergo and the Board recommends 
his election.

The Chairman has confirmed in the Chairman’s Statement, 
and the Board is satisfied that, following formal performance 
evaluation, the performance of each of the Directors offering 
themselves for re-election continues to be effective, and that 
each demonstrates commitment to the role.

Biographies of all Directors are set out on page 24.

Board Process 

The Board has a formal Schedule of Matters reserved to it 
for decision, which can be viewed on the Company’s website 
(www.tullettprebon.com). The Schedule includes, among 
other things:

•  approval of the Group’s strategy;

•  changes to the Group’s capital or corporate structure;

•  oversight of the Group’s management, governance and 

control structure;

•  approval of any material borrowing or commitment;

•  Board appointments and removals;

30  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

Board and Committee attendance record  

Executive Directors

John Phizackerley (appointed 1 September 2014)

Terry Smith (retired 31 August 2014)

Paul Mainwaring(1)

Non-executive Directors

Rupert Robson

Angela Knight

Roger Perkin

Stephen Pull

David Shalders

Board*

Audit 
Committee

Remuneration
 Committee

Nominations 
Committee

3/3

5/5

7/8

8/8

8/8

8/8

8/8

7/7

–

–

–

–

4/4

4/4

4/4

–

–

–

–

–

6/6

5/6

6/6

5/5

–

–

–

3/3

3/3

3/3

3/3

–

* 
Excludes meetings of Committees of the Board appointed to complete routine business or business previously approved by the Board.
(1)  Paul Mainwaring missed the Board meeting in November 2014 as he was required to give evidence at the New Jersey Superior Court. 

Nominations Committee

The Nominations Committee is chaired by Rupert Robson. 
The other members throughout the year were Angela Knight, 
Roger Perkin and Stephen Pull. 

All members of the Committee, other than the Chairman, are 
independent Non-executive Directors.

The Board has delegated responsibility to the Nominations 
Committee for:

•  reviewing the balance and skill, knowledge and experience 

of the Board;

•  agreeing and implementing procedures for the selection of 

new Board appointments; and

•  making recommendations to the Board on all proposed new 
appointments, elections and re-elections of Directors at 
Annual General Meetings.

The Nominations Committee is authorised to obtain all 
necessary information from within the Company and to 
access professional advice inside and outside the Company, 
as it considers necessary. The Terms of Reference of the 
Nominations Committee are available on the Company’s 
website (www.tullettprebon.com).

The Company has plans in place for orderly succession for 
appointments to the Board and to senior management, so as 
to maintain an appropriate balance of skills and experience 
within the Company and on the Board and to ensure the 
progressive refreshing of the Board. The search for Board 
candidates is conducted with due regard to the benefits of 
diversity on the Board, including gender. The Board makes 
appointments on merit against objective criteria and 
accordingly it does not set diversity targets.

Work of the Nominations Committee
As reported in last year’s Annual Report, the Nominations 
Committee dealt with the appointment of Non-executive 
Director David Shalders. The appointment was made with 
the explicit intention of raising the Board’s general level 
of awareness in the areas of technology and regulation. 
Consideration was given to the question of diversity, including 
gender, and the search duly considered female candidates too.

During the year the Nominations Committee undertook 
a process to recruit a new Chief Executive to succeed 
Terry Smith and the services of an external search consultant 
were retained to assist it. At the conclusion of the process, 
the Nominations Committee recommended to the Board 
the appointment of John Phizackerley as the new Chief 
Executive. In recommending this appointment to the Board, 
the Committee noted his distinguished track record in the 
investment banking industry including his roles at Lehman 
Brothers and Nomura Bank and his wide international 
experience. The Committee also judged that he displayed 
the characteristics of a strong and capable Chief Executive.

The external search consultancy retained by the Board in 
respect of John Phizackerley’s appointment was Spencer 
Stuart. The Company does not have any other connection 
with Spencer Stuart.

The Nominations Committee has initiated a search for 
a new Non-executive Director with specific experience in 
risk management. The individual will be the Chairman of 
a new Risk Committee of the Board. It is anticipated that a 
recommendation will be made to the Board in the first half 
of 2015.

The Nominations Committee implemented formal succession 
plans in the event that the Chief Executive or Financial Officer 
was absent on short notice. The Executive Directors were asked 
to propose similar short term succession plans for each of the 
members of the Executive Committee. The Committee also 
considered longer term succession within the Group at a senior 
level and has discussed this topic with the Chief Executive. 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  31

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
Corporate Governance Report continued

Relations with Shareholders 

Audit Committee  
Chairman’s Statement

The Board recognises the importance of communication with 
shareholders. The Company’s website, www.tullettprebon.
com, provides information for shareholders and prospective 
investors on the Group’s activities, results, products and 
recent developments.

There is regular dialogue with institutional investors, fund 
managers and analysts, including presentations around the 
time of the results announcements and also on request.

During 2014 the Company recorded a webcast of its 2014 
interim results presentation, which is also now available for 
download on the Company’s website. The Chairman had 
contact with all of the largest shareholders and intends to 
maintain regular contact in future. During the year the 
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee additionally met 
with many of the Company’s largest shareholders as part of 
the consultation on Executive Director remuneration.

The Senior Independent Non-executive Director and the 
other Non-executive Directors are available to meet with 
shareholders, should such meetings be requested.

For the payment of the recommended final dividend for 2014 
and future dividends, the Company has put in place a facility 
for payments to be made via CREST.

Annual General Meeting 
The Board uses the AGM to communicate with investors and 
welcomes their participation. Notice of the AGM and related 
papers are sent to shareholders at least 20 working days 
before the meeting. The Chairman aims to ensure that all of 
the Directors, including Chairmen of the Committees of the 
Board, are available at AGMs to answer questions and meet 
shareholders. The proxy votes cast on each resolution 
proposed at general meetings are disclosed at those meetings. 
To encourage shareholder participation, those shareholders 
whose shares are held via the CREST system are offered the 
facility to submit their proxy votes via CREST.

32  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

Dear Shareholder

As Chairman of the Audit Committee, I am pleased to introduce 
this report which sets out how the Committee has discharged its 
responsibilities during the year. The Committee’s primary focus is 
to ensure the integrity of the financial reporting by reviewing the 
controls in place and those areas where judgement is required. 
The other key areas in the Terms of Reference are set out below.

Outside of the formal Committee meetings, I maintain regular 
dialogue with internal and external auditors. Additionally I 
visited the Group in both New York and Singapore where I met 
both with local management and auditors in order better to 
understand local issues and the respective audit arrangements.

As requested by the Board, the Committee has considered the 
processes and controls in place to help ensure that the Annual 
Report presents a fair, balanced and understandable view of the 
business. As a result of this work the Committee concluded that 
the processes and controls were appropriate and was able to 
provide positive assurance to the Board.

Roger Perkin
Chairman
Audit Committee
3 March 2015

Composition
Roger Perkin chaired the Audit Committee throughout the 
year. The other members of the Committee throughout the 
year were Angela Knight and Stephen Pull. All members of 
the Committee are independent Non-executive Directors. 
The Audit Committee Chairman has recent and relevant 
financial experience.

The Chairman, the Executive Directors, the Company’s 
external and internal auditors, and other senior risk 
management and finance personnel attend Committee 
meetings by invitation. The Committee has a discussion with 
the external auditor at least once a year without the Executive 
Directors being present, to ensure that there are no 
unresolved issues of concern.

Terms of Reference
Throughout 2014 the Audit Committee’s terms of 
reference included:

•  recommendation on appointment and terms of 

engagement of the external auditor;

•  review of independence and objectivity of the 

external auditor;

•  approval of the annual audit plan, scope of engagement and 

review of effectiveness of the audit process;

•  monitoring the integrity of the Financial Statements;

•  review of the results of the audit;

•  review of the effectiveness of the Company’s internal 

control and risk management procedures;

•  approval of the annual internal audit plan, review of the 

effectiveness of the internal audit function, and 
consideration of internal audit reports;

•  review of the arrangements by which staff may, in 

confidence, raise concerns about improprieties in financial 
reporting and other matters; and

independent audit and the booking of any audit adjustments 
arising and the timely provision of draft public documents for 
review by the auditor and the Audit Committee.

•  provide advice to the Board on whether the Annual Report, 
taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and 
provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess 
the Company’s performance, business model and strategy.

The Terms of Reference of the Audit Committee are available 
on the Company’s website (www.tullettprebon.com).

Work of the Audit Committee since the date of 
the last Annual Report 
The Audit Committee was engaged in a number of 
workstreams during 2014 as described below.

Audit tenders
Deloitte LLP (‘Deloitte’) has been the Company’s auditor since 
its listing in December 2006.

In 2013 the Board put the external audit contract out for tender 
and concluded that Deloitte should be re-appointed and that a 
new lead audit partner would be appointed to the Company’s 
audit by Deloitte in 2014 in accordance with normal rotation 
practices. The Audit Committee will monitor developments in 
best practice with regard to audit tender arrangements.

At the same time that the external audit was put out for 
tender, the Audit Committee also reviewed the Company’s 
internal audit arrangements. The Audit Committee made a 
recommendation to the Board that KPMG should provide the 
resources to lead and manage the Company’s internal audit 
activities, and KPMG assumed responsibility for the Group’s 
Internal Audit with effect from 1 July 2014.

External auditor effectiveness and independence
In considering the 2014 Annual Report, the Audit Committee 
reviewed the objectivity and independence of the external 
auditor. The Audit Committee considered the professional and 
regulatory guidance on auditor independence and Deloitte’s 
policies and procedures for managing independence and was 
satisfied with the auditor’s representations. The Audit 
Committee reviewed the level of fees paid to the auditor in 
respect of the various non-audit services provided during 2014 
(which are disclosed in Note 6 to the Consolidated Financial 
Statements). The auditor confirmed to the Audit Committee 
that they did not believe that the level of non-audit fees had 
affected their independence. The Company’s policy is to use the 
most appropriate advisers for non-audit work, taking account of 
the need to maintain independence. To this end, the Company 
has defined those activities which cannot be provided by the 
external auditor in order to maintain independence. The Audit 
Committee reviewed this policy during the year to ensure that it 
continues to follow best practice.

During the year the Audit Committee considered the 
effectiveness of the external audit process including 
their expertise, efficiency, global service delivery and cost 
effectiveness. The effectiveness of management in the 
external audit process is assessed principally in relation to 
the timely identification and resolution of areas of accounting 
judgement, the quality and timeliness of papers analysing 
those judgements, management’s approach to the value of 

The Audit Committee also monitored performance during 
the audit of the 2014 financial statements which included 
receiving feedback from senior management. The conclusion 
from this exercise was that the 2014 external audit had 
been effective.

Review of the Financial Statements
The Audit Committee reviewed the integrity of the 
Consolidated Financial Statements included in the half-year 
and preliminary announcements of results and the 2014 
Annual Report, prior to their approval by the Board.

When conducting the review, the Committee considered 
the continuing appropriateness of the accounting policies, 
important financial reporting judgements and the adequacy 
and appropriateness of disclosures. The Audit Committee 
also reviewed the content of the Annual Report and advised 
the Board that, in its view, the Annual Report, taken as a 
whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the 
information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s 
performance, business model and strategy.

The Audit Committee considered the following judgements in 
connection with the 2014 Consolidated Financial Statements 
and were satisfied that the judgements were appropriate:

•  Acquisition of PVM Oil Associates Limited (‘PVM’)

On 26 November 2014, the Group completed the acquisition 
of PVM. In accordance with relevant accounting standards, 
management (with the assistance of independent valuation 
specialists) conducted a review of the acquired assets and 
liabilities to establish the nature and value of any separately 
identifiable intangible assets. Additionally, the exercise 
estimated the total fair value of assets and liabilities 
acquired, so as to establish the amount of goodwill to be 
recognised. Finally it was necessary to understand the 
nature of earn out and related contractual obligations so as 
to establish the correct accounting for the income stream.

The Committee received reports on the above issues 
from management, satisfied itself that all material facts 
had been taken into account, and concluded that the 
presentation of the PVM related balances is appropriate.

•  Impairment of goodwill and other intangibles

The key elements involved in the review of goodwill for 
impairment are described in Note 13; and the procedures 
adopted by the external auditor in their report.

The Committee considered whether the facts taken into 
account were complete and consistent with the Group’s 
business planning process, and challenged the auditor as 
to the extent to which they had examined potential stress 
outcomes to the base case used, particularly in areas where 
there is limited headroom.

Based on the above the Committee is satisfied with the process 
undertaken and the resultant financial statement impact.

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  33

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationCorporate Governance Report continued

•  Taxation

Notwithstanding the Group’s low appetite for complex 
tax structuring, the dynamic nature of its global operations 
necessarily gives rise to uncertainties where judgements 
need to be made as to likely outcomes. Management regularly 
presents the status of open tax issues to the Committee, and, 
it is satisfied that an appropriately considered and prudent 
approach is taken to tax provisioning.

•  Revenue

The recognition of revenue by the Group requires little 
judgement but is reliant to a significant degree on strong 
internal controls (see below).

•  Going concern

The assumptions relating to the going concern review were 
considered, including the medium term projections, stress 
tests and mitigation plans. On the basis of the review the 
Audit Committee advised the Board that it was appropriate 
for the Annual Report and Financial Statements to be 
prepared on the going concern basis.

Risk management and internal control
The Board is responsible for setting the Group’s risk appetite 
and ensuring that it has an appropriate and effective risk 
management framework and for monitoring the ongoing 
process for identifying, evaluating, managing and reporting 
the significant risks faced by the Group. The Group’s Enterprise 
Risk Management Framework and principal risks are described 
in the Risk Management section of the Strategic Report. 
During 2014 the Audit Committee twice reviewed and 
approved the Risk Assessment Framework.

The Board is also responsible for the Group’s system of 
internal control and for reviewing its effectiveness. The 
system is designed to manage rather than eliminate the risk 
of failure to achieve business objectives, and can only provide 
reasonable and not absolute assurance against misstatement 
or loss. In discharging its responsibilities in this respect, the 
Board has appointed the Audit Committee to carry out the 
annual review of the effectiveness of the internal control and 
risk management systems and to report to the Board thereon. 

This process has been in place for the year under review and 
up to the date of approval of the Annual Report, is reviewed 
regularly by the Board and accords with the FRC’s “Internal 
Control : Guidance for Directors”. 

The Audit Committee conducted a formal review of the 
effectiveness of the Group’s internal control systems for 2014, 
considering reports from management, external audit and the 
work of the Group risk control and internal audit functions.

Effectiveness of Internal Audit
The Audit Committee is responsible for monitoring and 
reviewing the effectiveness of Internal Audit. The internal 
audit plan is approved by the Audit Committee and kept 
under review during the year, in order to reflect the changing 
business needs and to ensure new and emerging risks are 
considered. During 2014 the Audit Committee reviewed 
the work and reports of Internal Audit, together with 
implementation of internal audit recommendations and 
monitored progress against the internal audit plan for the 
first  half of 2014 to ensure that the audit plan had been 
completed effectively.

The Audit Committee reviewed and approved the internal 
audit plan for the new internal audit year, running from 1 July 
2014 to 30 June 2015, prepared by the new head of internal 
audit, and reviewed the work and reports of internal audit 
since 1 July 2014 .

Confidential reporting
The Audit Committee reviewed arrangements by which staff 
may, in confidence, raise concerns about improprieties in 
matters of financial reporting or other matters. In conducting 
the review, the Committee took into account whether the 
policies were in line with guidance published by the FCA.

34  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

Report on Directors’ Remuneration
Remuneration Committee 
Chairman’s Statement

During 2015 we intend to make additional changes to the way 
in which we implement our Remuneration Policy. In future our 
Executive Directors will be set individual bonus targets within 
the current approved range of operating profits. Our Chief 
Executive will be entitled to receive a bonus of 1.825 – 2.175% 
of Bonus Pool Operating Profit and our Finance Director will be 
entitled to a bonus of 0.675-0.825% of Bonus Pool Operating 
Profit. Within these ranges bonuses will be awarded according 
to individual performances measured against individual 
targets and objectives. The Committee believes that this 
change will enhance individual accountability and further 
align our Remuneration Policy with the Company’s strategy. 

We are currently considering an arrangement to introduce 
an element of share based remuneration for senior staff 
in 2015 in order to align better the interests of senior staff 
and shareholders.

Stephen Pull
Chairman 
Remuneration Committee 
3 March 2015

Decisions for 2014
•  Contract negotiations for new Chief Executive;

•  Departure arrangements for Terry Smith;

•  Aggregate bonus pool award below range set out in our 

Remuneration Policy; and

•  Agreed a new distribution of the bonus pool for 2015 with 

specific objectives for each Executive Director.

Dear Shareholder

The external environment has continued to be very 
challenging although the impact has been substantially 
mitigated by the cost reduction programme undertaken 
during the course of the year. As a consequence underlying 
operating margins have been protected. The ratio of broker 
compensation to revenue has fallen again from 58.3% 
to 56.1%.

In 2013 and early 2014 we conducted a very extensive 
consultation exercise with shareholders prior to the approval 
of the Remuneration Policy at the AGM in 2014. This year, 
operating within the terms of the Remuneration Policy, we 
have continued to take full account of shareholders’ views. 

As part of the recruitment process of our new Chief Executive 
we took the opportunity to reassess base salary, which was 
reduced from £650,000 pa to £550,000 pa.

In prior years the discretionary bonus pool was calculated 
based on operating profits before taking account of any 
reorganisation costs. Although at the time we felt there 
was a good business rationale for this, a small number of 
shareholders commented that if such costs were incurred in 
future it might be more appropriate to calculate the bonus 
pool after restructuring costs. For 2014, the Remuneration 
Committee determined that the operating profit used to 
calculate the bonus pool for the Executive Directors, (the 
“Bonus Pool Operating Profit”), would be based on the 
reported operating profit, after exceptional items, excluding 
the operating profit earned in 2014 from PVM which was 
acquired towards the end of November, and adding back the 
charge relating to the impairment of goodwill attributed to 
the business in Brazil. This latter adjustment is consistent with 
the approach taken in previous years when the Committee 
has exercised its discretion to exclude goodwill impairment 
charges. The Bonus Pool Operating Profit for 2014 of 
£53.8m compares with the Bonus Pool Operating Profit 
for 2013 of £100.2m.

Although Terry Smith, our former Chief Executive, did not 
retire until 31 August 2014 he received no discretionary bonus 
for 2014. The departure arrangements for Terry Smith are 
discussed on page 44. The Committee has therefore decided 
that in this unusual circumstance the aggregate bonus pool 
should fall below the usual range of 2.5 - 3.0% of Bonus Pool 
Operating Profit and has awarded a bonus pool of £1.032m 
equivalent to 1.92% of Bonus Pool Operating Profit.

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  35

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
Report on Directors’ Remuneration continued

As required by the Remuneration Code, an annual central 
and independent review of compliance with policies and 
procedures for remuneration adopted by the Company was 
undertaken. This work, conducted by KPMG the Company’s 
internal auditor, provided the Remuneration Committee 
with an independent assessment of compliance with the 
Remuneration Code and supported the Remuneration 
Committee’s conclusion that the Company continues to 
comply with the Remuneration Code. The Remuneration 
Policy Statement, including the list of Remuneration Code 
staff, has been reviewed, and the disclosures required to be 
made under the Remuneration Code have been approved. 
These disclosures are available on the Company’s website, 
www.tullettprebon.com.

The Report on Directors’ Remuneration has been prepared in 
accordance with the Large and Medium-sized Companies and 
Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013, 
the UKLA Listing Rules and the UK Corporate Governance Code. 
The Companies Act 2006 requires the auditor to report to the 
Company’s members on certain parts of the Report on 
Directors’ Remuneration and to state whether in their opinion 
those parts of the report have been properly prepared in 
accordance with the regulations. 

The Remuneration Committee Chairman’s statement, 
the Directors’ Remuneration Policy and certain parts of the 
Annual Report on Remuneration (indicated in that report) 
are unaudited. 

Definitions used in this report
‘Executive Director’ means any executive member of the 
Board;

‘Senior Management’ means those members of the 
Company’s Executive Committee (other than the Executive 
Directors) and the first level of management below that level;

‘Broker’ means front office revenue generators; 

‘Control Functions’ means those employees engaged in 
functions such as Compliance, Legal, HR, Finance, Operations 
and Risk Control;

‘Remuneration Code’ means the Remuneration Code of the 
FCA; and

‘2013 Regulations’ means the Large and Medium-sized 
Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) 
Regulations 2013.

Governance 

The role of the Remuneration Committee 
The Remuneration Committee is chaired by Stephen Pull. The 
other members of the Remuneration Committee throughout 
the year were Angela Knight, Roger Perkin and David Shalders 
who was appointed on 27 February 2014. All members of the 
Remuneration Committee are independent Non-executive 
Directors.

The Remuneration Committee is responsible on behalf of the 
Board for developing and maintaining formal and transparent 
policies on remuneration for the Company’s employees, the 
framework in which that policy is applied, and its cost. In 
addition, the Remuneration Committee regularly reviews 
remuneration policies to ensure that they continue to be 
compliant with the relevant corporate governance and 
regulatory requirements, including the Remuneration Code.

The Remuneration Committee is responsible, on behalf of the 
Board, for:

•  reviewing and approving the general principles of the 

Company’s remuneration policies;

•  considering the relationship between incentives and risk;

•  determining the application of the Company’s remuneration 

policies to the Executive Directors;

•  reviewing the application of the Company’s remuneration 

policies to Senior Management, Brokers and Control 
Functions;

•  determining the remuneration of Executive Directors and 

the Chairman;

•  approving the remuneration of Senior Management after 

consultation with the Chief Executive;

•  approving all share and long term incentive schemes and 

their application; and

•  reviewing and approving the Report on Directors’ 

Remuneration.

The Terms of Reference of the Remuneration Committee are 
available on the Company’s website, www.tullettprebon.com.

The Chairman and the Executive Directors attend the 
Remuneration Committee by invitation. The Chairman and 
the Executive Directors are not permitted to be in attendance 
when any matter relating to their own remuneration is 
being discussed.

During 2014 the Remuneration Committee also undertook 
the regular tasks of approving the remuneration of Senior 
Management and addressing the Company’s obligations 
under the Remuneration Code which apply to the Company 
and its FCA regulated subsidiaries (which remain in the lowest 
category for the purposes of the Remuneration Code – 
classified as Proportionality Level Three) including reviewing 
the remuneration of all Remuneration Code staff.

36  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

Directors’ Remuneration Policy

The remuneration policy was subject to a shareholders’ 
binding vote at the 2014 AGM and it is not proposed that the 
current policy is revised at the 2015 AGM. The remuneration 
policy approved at the 2014 AGM can also be found on the 
Company’s website www.tullettprebon.com, pages 35 and 36 
of the Annual Report and Accounts 2013.

Background
In reviewing and approving the general principles of the 
Company’s remuneration policy which apply throughout 
the Group, the Remuneration Committee took account of the 
corporate objective to maximise returns to shareholders over 
the medium to long term with an acceptable level of risk. 
The Remuneration Committee was mindful that the Group’s 
strategy to achieve that objective is to continue to develop its 
business, operating as an intermediary in the world’s major 
wholesale OTC and exchange traded financial and commodity 
markets, with the scale and breadth to deliver superior 
performance and returns, underpinned by strong financial 
management disciplines and without actively taking credit 
and market risk.

The Remuneration Committee took into account general 
practices in the parts of the financial services sector in 
which the Company operates,and in particular those of the 
Company’s competitors which include BGC Partners Inc, 
GFI Group Inc, ICAP plc and Compagnie Financière Tradition. 
These practices are characterised by high levels of variable 
remuneration. The Remuneration Committee concluded that 
it is in the best interests of the Company and shareholders to 
pay remuneration in line with market practice in the sectors 
in  which the Company operates.

The Company’s remuneration policy is designed to attract, 
motivate and retain staff with the necessary skills and 
experience to deliver the strategy, in order to achieve the 
Company’s objective.

Risk
The Remuneration Committee considered the relationship 
between incentives and risk when approving remuneration 
policy which will apply throughout the Group.

Details of the Company’s key risks and risk management 
are set out in the Strategic Report of this Annual Report on 
pages 4 to 23. The majority of transactions are brokered on a 
Name Passing basis where the business is not a counterparty 
to a trade.

Commissions earned on these activities are received monthly 
in cash. The business does not take any trading risk and does 
not hold principal trading positions. The business only holds 
financial instruments for identified buyers and sellers in 
matching trades which are generally settled within 1-3 days. 
The business does not retain any contingent market or 
counterparty risks. The business does not have valuation 
issues in measuring its profits.

The Remuneration Committee concluded that the Company’s 
remuneration policy reflects the low risk profile of the 
Company, is consistent with and promotes sound and effective 
risk management, and does not encourage risk taking.

The Remuneration Committee considers that the Company’s 
remuneration policy is consistent with the measures set out 
in the business’s compliance manuals relating to conflicts 
of interest.

The Company’s policy is to ensure that variable remuneration 
is not paid through vehicles or methods that facilitate 
avoidance of the Remuneration Code.

Policy table
The policy which has been applied in respect of Executive 
Director and Non-executive Director remuneration is 
summarised in the table below. The policy set out in this table 
is that which is currently in practice and which was subject to a 
binding vote of shareholders at the 2014 AGM. For the purposes 
of the 2013 Regulations, the policy applies from the 2014 AGM.

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  37

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationReport on Directors’ Remuneration continued

How remuneration 
supports the Company’s 
short and long term 
strategic objectives

Executive Directors

Fixed remuneration

To provide a level of 
fixed remuneration 
reflecting the scope of 
individual responsibilities 
to attract and retain high 
calibre individuals

Benefits

Operation

Maximum payable

Performance framework

Recovery/ 
withholding

Paid monthly in arrears. Reviewed 
periodically to ensure not significantly 
out of line with the market. 

Fixed remuneration 
will not be reviewed 
until 2017.

None

None

To provide basic benefits 
but otherwise to avoid 
provision of benefits

Medical cover and participation in any 
schemes for all UK employees such as 
the group life insurance scheme. 

Relocation or the temporary provision 
of accommodation may be offered 
where the Company requires a 
Director to relocate. 

The Remuneration Committee may 
determine that Executive Directors 
should receive other reasonable 
benefits if appropriate, taking into 
account typical market practice.

None

None

No new benefits will 
be introduced during 
the term of this 
Remuneration Policy, 
unless such benefits 
are made available to 
all UK employees.

Pension

To make basic pension 
provision

Membership of a defined contribution 
pension scheme.

6% of fixed 
remuneration up to a 
cap set at £105,600.

None

Annual discretionary bonus

Aim is to motivate 
and retain Executive 
Directors, consistent 
with the risk appetite 
determined by the Board 
and thereby to achieve 
superior returns for 
shareholders. It provides 
a direct link between the 
achievement of annual 
business performance 
targets and reward

The shareholding 
requirements align 
Directors’ interests 
with shareholders

Allocation of pool takes account of 
individual contribution and relative 
responsibilities. No payment is made 
if the Remuneration Committee is not 
satisfied with personal performance. No 
contractual entitlement to a bonus if the 
Executive Director is not in employment 
or is under notice on the payment date.

Directors must invest 50% of 
post-tax annual bonuses in the 
Company’s shares for three years 
(‘the investment requirement’). This 
investment requirement can be met, 
in part or in full, by ordinary shares 
already held, excluding any shares 
already being counted towards 
investment requirements in relation 
to previous bonus payments.

The maximum 
aggregate Executive 
Directors’ bonus is 3% 
of Group reported 
operating profit, rising 
to 5% in the event that 
one or more new 
Executive Directors are 
appointed. Operating 
profit may not exceed 
150% of the operating 
profit used to calculate 
the previous year’s 
bonus. In exceptional 
circumstances 
payments may be 
made outside this 
range. Adjustments 
may be made in 
relation to significant 
acquisitions.

Pool is 2.5-3% of Group 
reported operating profit, 
provided operating profit 
exceeds a threshold 
calculated as the weighted 
average cost of capital times 
the average capital employed. 
In exceptional circumstances 
payments may be made 
outside this range. 
Adjustments may be made 
in relation to significant 
acquisitions.

The pool may be extended 
to a maximum of 5% of 
reported operating profit 
to accommodate one or more 
new Executive Directors. In 
such circumstances, the 
existing Executive Directors 
will not be entitled to 
participate in the additional 
pool.

None

Clawback of 
the element of 
bonus subject 
to investment 
requirement 
in the event 
of material 
misstatement 
of results for 
the period to 
which the bonus 
related which 
caused the 
bonus to be paid 
at too high a 
level or if an 
Executive 
Director’s 
conduct is found 
to amount to 
gross misconduct 
and/or fraud, 
wilful dishonesty 
or accounting 
malfeasance.

38  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

Operation

Maximum payable

Performance framework

Recovery/ 
withholding

How remuneration 
supports the Company’s 
short and long term 
strategic objectives

Minimum shareholding

Aligns Directors’ 
interests with 
shareholders by focusing 
on longer term 
shareholder returns

LTIS

Aligns Directors’ 
interests with 
shareholders by focusing 
on longer term 
shareholder returns

Directors must hold a minimum 
number of the Company’s ordinary 
shares equivalent to 300% of basic 
salary in respect of the Chief 
Executive and 150% of basic salary for 
all other Executive Directors. Shares 
acquired to meet the investment 
requirement attaching to annual 
bonuses can be used to meet this 
requirement.

Annual awards equivalent to the 
higher of aggregate basic salary 
and 25% of the prior year aggregate 
variable remuneration (or basic salary 
for a new Executive Director) of 
Executive Directors in office at the 
date of the award. Awards are 
satisfied in cash when all relevant 
performance conditions have 
been measured.

Non-executive Directors

Fees

To attract high calibre, 
experienced Non-
executive Directors

Paid monthly in arrears. Periodically 
benchmarked against other UK listed 
companies of comparable size and 
activities. Additional fees for 
additional responsibilities of the 
Senior Independent Non-executive 
Director, for chairing each of the Audit 
and Remuneration Committees or 
other services performed such as 
acting as a trustee of a Company 
pension scheme.

None

None

None

Maximum is as 
described in the 
‘Operation’ column.

Performance conditions are 
measured over a period of at 
least three years.

Performance conditions are 
50% based on TSR relative to 
FTSE 250 companies 
excluding investment trusts, 
25% based on average cash 
flow before dividends and 
debt repayments and 25% 
based on ROE relative to 
IDB competitors.

For each element of the 
award, vesting starts at 25% 
at threshold performance 
rising on a straightline basis 
to 100% for maximum 
performance.

The level of 
vesting of an 
award may 
be reduced, 
including to 
nil, in the event 
of a material 
misstatement 
of results that 
caused the LTIS 
award to be 
granted at too 
high a level or 
if an Executive 
Director’s 
conduct is found 
to amount to 
gross misconduct 
and/or fraud, 
wilful dishonesty 
or accounting 
malfeasance.

Aggregate annual fees 
limited to £700,000 
in the Articles of 
Association.

None

None

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  39

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
Report on Directors’ Remuneration continued

Notes to the policy table
Performance measures
The annual discretionary bonus payable to Executive Directors 
is calculated as a percentage of reported operating profit. 
The operation of the Executive Director bonus scheme was 
changed in 2013 following the Remuneration Committee’s 
review of Executive Director remuneration and shareholder 
consultation. Operating profit is a key performance indicator, 
is a clear and simple metric and was chosen as it links 
remuneration directly with business performance. The 
percentage range of profit allocated to the bonus scheme 
was chosen to provide an acceptable level of variable 
remuneration for the Executive Directors while at the 
same time delivering value to shareholders.

The introduction of the new LTIS in 2013 also followed the 
review of Executive Director remuneration referred to above.

Performance measures used for the LTIS were chosen by 
the Remuneration Committee, with advice having been 
provided by PwC and following consultation with significant 
shareholders. The relative TSR measure had been used as a 
metric for the LTIP for several years and despite its many well 
recognised limitations, shareholders were keen for it to be 
retained as a substantial component of the metrics for the 
LTIS. Half of LTIS awards are therefore subject to the relative 
TSR performance measure. However, the Remuneration 
Committee was also concerned to incorporate new metrics to 
target and reward good operating performance measured by 
reference to the Company’s cash flow generation, and return 
on equity compared with the Company’s IDB competitors. 
Both metrics are regarded by the Board as key performance 
indicators. One quarter of LTIS awards are accordingly subject 
to these performance conditions respectively. The targets 
were set, having regard to recent performance and at a level 
which would be seen to be achievable but at the same time 
could be expected to be challenging.

Policy on Directors’ remuneration compared with 
employees generally
As a general rule, the same principles are applied to Directors’ 
fixed remuneration, pension contributions and benefits as 
are applied to employees throughout the organisation. A 
competitive level of fixed remuneration is paid to all staff 
taking into account their responsibilities and experience and 
minimal pension provision and benefits are provided, the 
Board considering that employees are best placed to 
determine priorities for funds set aside for remuneration.

There are a number of different bonus schemes in operation 
throughout the Group for Brokers, management and other 
employees. Brokers’ bonus schemes are described below; all 
other bonuses are generally discretionary.

During 2013, the Remuneration Committee introduced a cap 
on Executive Directors’ bonuses in response to requests from 
shareholders. However, the Remuneration Committee does 
not believe that the formal capping of bonuses for Senior 
Management and Brokers is consistent with the delivery of 
enhanced returns to shareholders and accordingly no caps have 
been introduced on Senior Management’s or Brokers’ bonuses.

Executive Directors’ variable remuneration is also subject to a 
requirement that at least 50% net of tax of bonus payments 
must be invested in the Company’s shares to be held for a 
minimum period of at least three years.

Clawback arrangements apply to this element of variable 
remuneration for the duration of the investment requirement. 
The Remuneration Committee has concluded that given 
the Company’s low risk profile and the fact that this is 
not consistent with market practice in the Company’s key 
competitor organisations, neither deferral nor clawback 
arrangements are applied to variable remuneration paid 
to other staff.

The LTIS has been put in place for the benefit of the Executive 
Directors only. 

Remuneration policies for Brokers
The Company’s remuneration policy for Brokers is based on 
the principle that remuneration is directly based on financial 
performance, generally at a desk team level, and is calculated in 
accordance with formulae set out in contracts of employment. 
These formulae take into account the fixed costs of the Brokers, 
and variable remuneration payments are therefore based on 
the profits that the Brokers generate for the business. Initial 
contract payments are only paid upfront when a claw-back 
provision is included in the contract of employment. Typically, 
Brokers receive a fixed salary paid regularly throughout the 
year, with a significant proportion of variable remuneration 
dependent on revenue, which is paid after the revenue has 
been fully received in cash.

Remuneration policies for Control Functions
The Company’s remuneration policy for Control Functions 
is that remuneration is adequate to attract qualified and 
experienced staff, is in accordance with the achievement of 
objectives linked to their functions, and is independent of the 
performance of the business areas they support. Employees in 
such functions report through an organisation structure that 
is separate to and independent from the business units. Heads 
of Control Functions are designated as Remuneration Code 
staff and accordingly their remuneration is reviewed by the 
Remuneration Committee.

40  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

Illustrations of the application of remuneration 
policy (updated for 2015)
The total remuneration for each of the Executive Directors 
for a minimum, target and maximum performance for 2015 
is presented in the charts below:

John Phizackerley 

4,000

0
0
0
£

3,000

2,000

1,000

550
100%

0

Minimum

2,960

22%

59%

19%

Maximum

2,348

14%

63%

23%

Target

Basic salary and benefits

Bonus

LTIS

Paul Mainwaring

4,000

0
0
0
£

3,000

2,000

1,000

0

1,017
12%

54%

34%

Target

1,261
19%

53%

28%

Maximum

350

100%

Minimum

Basic salary and benefits

Bonus

LTIS

As the variable remuneration calculation is based on a 
percentage of reported operating profit, the Board has prepared 
the above illustrations using Bonus Pool Operating Profit in 
2014 capped at 150% to avoid including a profit forecast.

Outside directorships
The Board recognises that external non-executive 
appointments and certain other business appointments are 
beneficial both to Executive Directors and the Company.

Executive Directors are entitled to retain any remuneration in 
connection with such appointments.

Executive Directors’ service agreements and 
loss of office entitlements
The Executive Directors’ contracts may be terminated (by 
either party) on the expiry of 12 months’ written notice (save 
in  circumstances justifying summary termination), or by 
making a payment in lieu of notice at the Company’s election. 
The Company will consider the scope for requiring the Executive 
Director to mitigate his loss when taking account of all the 
circumstances surrounding the termination of employment. 
The Executive Director would also be entitled to accrued but 
untaken holiday.

The contracts do not provide for termination payments in 
excess of salary and contractual benefits. Post-termination 
restrictive covenants also apply to each Executive Director.

In addition to the contractual rights to a payment on loss of 
office, any employee including the Executive Directors may 
have additional statutory and/or common law rights to certain 
additional payments, for example in a redundancy situation.

When determining payments for loss of office, the Company 
will take account of all relevant circumstances on a case by 
case basis including (but not limited to): the contractual notice 
provisions and outstanding holiday; the best interests of the 
Company; whether the Executive Director has presided over 
an orderly handover; the contribution of the Executive 
Director to the success of the Company during their tenure; 
and the need to compromise any claims that the Executive 
Director may have or to pay the Executive Director’s legal 
costs on a settlement agreement.

The LTIS rules provide for an award to lapse where an 
Executive Director ceases to hold office or employment 
with a Group company other than through death, although 
the Remuneration Committee may exercise its discretion to 
allow an award to vest to the extent that the performance 
conditions have been met other than in circumstances 
involving gross misconduct, fraud, willful dishonesty or 
accounting malfeasance, and, unless the Remuneration 
Committee determines otherwise, pro-rating for time.

Non-executive Directors’ appointment letters
The Non-executive Directors serve under letters of 
appointment which are terminable on the earliest of the 
Director not being re-elected at an AGM, removed as a 
director or required to vacate office under the Articles of 
Association, on resignation, at the request of the Board or 
subject to 12 months’ notice.

Recruitment of Directors
The Remuneration Committee’s approach to setting 
remuneration for new Executive Directors is to ensure that 
the Company pays market rates, with reference to internal 
pay levels, the external market, location of the executive 
and remuneration received from the previous employer.

Salary will be provided in line with market rates, and the 
Remuneration Committee reserves discretion to offer 
appropriate pension and benefit arrangements, which may 
include the continuation of benefits received in a previous role. 
On-going variable pay awards for a newly appointed Executive 
Director will be as described in the Policy table, subject to the 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  41

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationReport on Directors’ Remuneration continued

same maximum opportunities. It is not currently intended that 
future service contracts for Executive Directors would contain 
terms differing materially from those summarised in this report, 
including with respect to notice provisions.

Relocation payments may also be set, within limits to 
be determined by the Remuneration Committee, where 
considered appropriate and in the Company’s best interests 
to do so.

The Remuneration Committee may consider offering 
additional cash or share-based payments to buyout existing 
awards forfeited by a new Executive Director when it 
considers these to be in the best interests of the Company and 
its shareholders. Any such buyout payments would mirror so 
far as possible the remuneration lost when leaving the former 
employer. The Remuneration Committee may avail itself of 
the current Listing Rule exemption to make such buyout 
awards where doing so is necessary to facilitate, in exceptional 
circumstances, the recruitment of the relevant individual.

Annual Report on Remuneration

In cases of appointing a new Executive Director by way of 
internal promotion, the Group will honour any contractual 
commitments made prior to their promotion to Executive 
Director.

The fee payable to a new Non-executive Director will be in line 
with the fee structure for Non-executive Directors in place at 
the date of appointment.

The Annual Statement made by the Chairman on page 35 and this annual report on remuneration is subject to a shareholders’ 
advisory vote at the forthcoming AGM. Information in this report is audited except where stated.

Members of the Remuneration Committee during the year were Stephen Pull, Chairman, David Shalders (appointed 27 February 
2014), Roger Perkin and Angela Knight.

The single total remuneration for each of the Directors who held office during the year ended 31 December 2014 was as follows:

Salaries and fees

Benefits

Bonus(1)

Pension

Total

2014 
£000

2013 
£000

2014 
£000

2013 
£000

2014 
£000

2013
 £000

2014 
£000

2013 
£000

2014 
£000

2013 
£000

Executive Directors

John Phizackerley(2)

Terry Smith(3)

Paul Mainwaring

Non-executive 
Directors

Rupert Robson(4)

Angela Knight

Roger Perkin

Stephen Pull(5)

David Shalders(6)

Keith Hamill(7)

David Clark(8)

183

494

350

–

650

294

175

153

59

62

62

45

–

–

58

55

55

–

32

20

1,430

1,317

–

1

1

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

2

–

2

1

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

3

537

–

495

–

2,204

551

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

1,032

2,755

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

720

495

846

–

2,856

846

175

153

59

62

62

45

–

–

58

55

55

–

32

20

2,464

4,075

Notes:
(1)  50% of the bonus is subject to investment in the Company’s ordinary shares as detailed in the policy table.
(2)  Appointed 1 September 2014.
(3)  Former Chief Executive retired 31 August 2014. Includes £60,233 LTIS award assessed to termination date and subject to pro-rating.
(4)  In addition he received £1,000 as a pension trustee.
(5)  In addition he received £4,000 as a pension trustee (2013: £3,000).
(6)  Appointed 27 February 2014.
(7)  Retired 6 March 2013.
(8)  Retired 9 May 2013.
(9)  No LTIP awards vested in either 2014 or 2013 as the performance conditions were not satisfied.

42  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

Awards under the Long Term Incentive 
Scheme (‘LTIS’)
Awards under the LTIS made in 2014, amounted to £400,000 
for John Phizackerley and £200,000 for Paul Mainwaring. The 
awards have a normal vesting date of 30 June 2017 and are 
subject to malus as described in the Directors’ Remuneration 
Policy and the following performance conditions:

•  The vesting of half of the awards is subject to relative TSR 

performance over the three years to 31 December 2016, with 
minimum vesting of 25% of the awards if the percentile 
ranking of the Company’s TSR over the respective period 
relative to the TSR of all other companies comprising, at 
the start of the relevant performance period, the FTSE 250 
(excluding investment trusts) is 50th and with maximum 
vesting of 100% if it is 25th or better;

•  The vesting of one quarter of the awards is subject to 

average cash flow before debt repayments and dividends 
performance over the three years to 31 December 2016 
(‘Cash flow’), with minimum vesting of 25% if Cash flow 
equals or exceeds £40m and maximum vesting of 100% 
if Cash flow equals or exceeds £150m; and

•  The vesting of one quarter of the awards is subject to return 
on equity performance compared with the Company’s IDB 
competitors over the three years to 31 December 2016 (or 
equivalent financial year in respect of competitors), with 
minimum vesting of 25% if the Company’s ROE equals the 
average ROE of competitors and maximum vesting of 100% 
if the Company’s ROE is three times the average or better. 
The companies comprising the comparator group are BGC 
Partners Inc, GFI Group Inc, ICAP plc and Compagnie 
Financière Tradition.

Basis(1)

John 
Phizackerley

Paul 
Mainwaring

Nature of 
Award 

Face Value

Threshold 
Vesting

End of 
Performance
 Period

Cash

£400,000

25%

31.12.16

Cash

£200,000

25%

31.12.16

(1)  Our Remuneration Policy is to make Annual Awards equivalent to the 
higher of aggregate basic salary and 25% of the prior year aggregate 
variable remuneration (or basic salary for a new Executive Director) or of 
Executive Directors in office at the date of the award. In 2014 the aggregate 
award was reduced because John Phizackerley joined during the course 
of 2014.

Fixed remuneration
The fixed remuneration of the Chief Executive, John 
Phizackerley was £550,000 (pro rata). The fixed remuneration 
of the former Chief Executive, Terry Smith, was £650,000 
(pro rata) and had not been changed since 2005. The fixed 
remuneration of the Finance Director, Paul Mainwaring was 
£350,000 and has not changed since October 2013.

Annual bonus
The Remuneration Committee determined that the bonus 
pool for 2014 should amount to £1.032m, which represented 
1.92% of Bonus Pool Operating Profit. In prior years the 
discretionary bonus pool was calculated based on operating 
profits before taking account of any reorganisation costs. 
Although at the time we felt there was a good business 
rationale for this, a small number of shareholders commented 
that if such costs were incurred in future it might be more 
appropriate to calculate the bonus pool after restructuring 
costs. Consequently our Remuneration Policy calculates the 
bonus pool after restructuring costs.

In 2014 we incurred restructuring costs of £46.7m which 
materially reduced the bonus pool. 

The Remuneration Policy requires that for any bonus to be 
awarded operating profit must exceed a threshold calculated 
as the weighted average cost of capital times the average 
capital employed. The Committee determined that the Bonus 
Pool Operating Profit had exceeded this threshold. The Bonus 
Pool Operating Profit used to determine the aggregate bonus 
pool in 2014 does not exceed 150% of the operating profit 
used to calculate the bonus in 2013.

The allocation to each of the Executive Directors took 
into consideration their personal contribution and relative 
responsibilities. 50% of the 2014 bonus net of tax has to 
be invested in the Company’s ordinary shares to be held 
for three years and will be subject to clawback as described 
in the Directors’ Remuneration Policy during this time. The 
reinvestment requirement does not have any service or 
other non performance conditions attaching to it.

Taking into account the bonus provisions of his employment 
contract and operating within the terms of the Directors’ 
Remuneration Policy, John Phizackerley has been awarded a 
bonus of £536,667 which includes an exceptional payment 
of £178,000 to recognise his contribution to the Company and 
the fact that the reported operating profit, which is used to 
calculate the level of his bonus, is lower than was anticipated 
at the time of the negotiations relating to his employment 
contract primarily as a consequence of higher restructuring 
costs emerging between the 9 May 2014 Interim Management 
Statement and the 29 July 2014 Interim Results 
announcement.

Paul Mainwaring has been awarded a bonus of £495,000 
(2013: £551,000) reflecting a particularly strong individual 
performance during 2014, which was a year of substantial 
change including the retirement of Terry Smith and the joining 
of John Phizackerley as Chief Executive.

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  43

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationReport on Directors’ Remuneration continued

Awards under the Long Term Incentive Plan (‘LTIP’)
The LTIP awards made in 2012 lapsed on 31 December 2014 as the performance conditions attached to these awards were not 
achieved. There are no other outstanding unvested awards under the LTIP.

The outstanding share options awarded to each of the Executive Directors are set out in the table below: 

Director

Terry Smith

Paul Mainwaring

Shares 
under 
option at 
1 Jan 
2014

302,148

571,719

 142,930

 Date 
of grant

22 June 
2009

21 June 
2012

21 June 
2012

Granted

Exercised

Lapsed

Shares 
under 
option at 
31 Dec 
2014

Exercise 
price

302,148 £1 in total

–

 –

–

–

571,719(1) 

0 £1 in total

 142,930

 0  £1 in total

Earliest 
exercise 
date

22 June
 2012

21 June 
2015

21 June 
2015

Expiry
 date

21 June 
2019

20 June
 2022

20 June
 2022

Notes:
(1)  Lapsed on termination as performance conditions not met.
(2)  The performance conditions attached to these awards were; 50% of award based on Total Shareholder Return and 50% based on Absolute Shareholder Return.

Termination payments for Terry Smith
Terry Smith retired as a Director, with effect from 31 August 
2014 (the ‘Termination Date’). Details of his compensation 
package on leaving office, which are in line with the 
Company’s contractual obligations, are given below.

Accrued entitlements: Mr Smith was paid in respect of 
accrued salary and contractual benefits up to and including 
the Termination Date. He was also paid in respect of 
outstanding accrued holiday entitlement. Mr Smith did not 
receive any accrued bonus payment in respect of the 2014 
annual bonus scheme.

PILON: Pursuant to clause 1.3 of his service contract, Mr Smith 
was paid the sum of £652,000 in lieu of salary and contractual 
benefits he would have received during his notice period (less 
deductions for income tax and national insurance contributions). 
The PILON payment does not include any payment in lieu 
of bonus.

LTIP: The Option granted under the LTIP to Mr Smith on 22 
June 2009 over 302,148 shares (which is currently exercisable) 
will remain exercisable during the normal exercise period, 
ending on 21 June 2019.

In respect of the Option granted under the LTIP on 21 June 
2012 over 571,719 shares, the Remuneration Committee 
determined, pursuant to the rules of the LTIP, that this Option 
would vest subject to the applicable performance conditions 
assessed to the Termination Date and subject to pro-rating for 
time. The performance conditions were assessed and none of 
the shares vested.

Shareholding requirements
Half of the 2014 bonus awarded to each of the Executive 
Directors was subject to a condition that the net of tax 
amount to be paid at the end of March 2015 would 
be invested in the Company’s shares, to be held for a 
minimum of three years.

This investment requirement can be met, in part or in full, 
by ordinary shares already held, excluding any shares already 
being counted towards investment requirements in relation 
to previous bonus payments.

In 2013 a new overarching shareholding requirement was also 
introduced for the Executive Directors, details of which are set 
out in the Directors’ Remuneration Policy above.

Paul Mainwaring currently complies with the Company’s 
overarching minimum shareholding requirements and complies 
with investment requirements in respect of previously paid 
bonuses. John Phizackerley will purchase the required number 
of shares when his bonus is paid following the announcement 
of results on 3 March 2015.

Non-executive Directors’ fees
The fees paid to the Non-executive Directors are determined 
by the Board and the fees paid to the Chairman are determined 
by the Remuneration Committee. The fees for the Chairman 
increased from £175,000 to £200,000 per annum with effect 
from 1 March 2015. The Non-executive Directors’ fees were 
increased from £54,000 to £60,000 per annum with effect 
from 1 March 2015. Both increases reflect the fact that the 
fees have not changed since 2011 and the required workload 
has increased significantly. In addition, a fee of £5,000 per 
annum is paid to the Senior Independent Non-executive 
Director and the Chairmen of the Audit and Remuneration 
Committees each receive an annual fee of £7,500 in respect 
of the additional responsibility of chairing a committee. 
Non-executive Directors acting as trustees of the Company’s 
occupational pension scheme are entitled to an attendance 
fee of £1,000 per meeting. 

44  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

LTIS: Mr Smith was granted an Award under the LTIS on 20 
December 2013 with a maximum cash value of £800,000. The 
Remuneration Committee determined, pursuant to rules of the LTIS, 
that the Award would vest on the Termination Date subject to the 
applicable performance conditions assessed to the Termination Date 
and subject to pro-rating for time. The value of the Award was 
determined to be £60,233, as follows:

Award

2013

Value 
of Award

Vesting

Time 
Apportioned

£800,000

£218,880 

£60,233

50% of award based on relative TSR, 0% vested

25% of award based on ROE, 80.83% vested

25% of award based on cashflow, 28.61% vested

27.35% of total award vested  

Legal fees: The Company made a payment to Mr Smith’s legal 
advisers of £5,750 plus VAT, as a contribution towards legal 
advice in connection with Mr Smith’s termination of office. 

Save as set out above, no remuneration payment or loss of 
office payment was made to Mr Smith.

Consultancy arrangement: Mr Smith agreed to maintain 
his involvement with the Company as a consultant until 
31 August 2016, advising the Chairman and Board on matters 
relating to the management and strategic development of 
the Company. He will receive a fee, via a personal services 
company, of £250,000 per annum for providing the 
consultancy services.

Recruitment of Chief Executive 
As part of the recruitment process for the new Chief Executive, 
work was undertaken to ensure that John Phizackerley’s 
contract is consistent with the approved Remuneration Policy.

Directors’ interests
The interests (all beneficial) as at 31 December 2014 or the 
date of retirement from the Board of those persons who were 
Directors (and their connected persons) during the year in the 
ordinary share capital of the Company, were as follows:

Director

Rupert Robson

John Phizackerley(2)

Terry Smith(3)

Paul Mainwaring

Angela Knight

Roger Perkin

Stephen Pull

David Shalders(4)

LTIP awards(1)

Vested but 
unexercised

–

–

302,148

–

–

–

–

–

Exercised 
during the 
year

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Shares

Unvested

7,000

–

9,645,510

279,741

–

–

7,000

–

–

–

–

– 

–

–

–

–

Notes:
(1)  All LTIP awards are subject to performance conditions.
(2)  Appointed 1 September 2014.
(3)  Retired 31 August 2014. The option granted to Mr Smith on 22 June 2009 will remain exercisable during the normal exercise period, ending on 21 June 2019. 
The Remuneration Committee determined, pursuant to the rules of the LTIP that the Option granted on 21 June 2012 would vest subject to the applicable 
performance conditions assessed to the Termination Date and subject to pro-rating for time. The performance conditions were assessed and none of the 
shares vested and therefore the option lapsed.

(4)  Appointed 27 February 2014.
(5)  There were no changes in the interests of the Directors in the ordinary share capital of the Company from the end of the year to the date of this report.

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  45

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationReport on Directors’ Remuneration continued

The following information is not subject to audit.

Voting at the 2014 AGM
At the AGM held on 9 May 2014 the following votes were cast 
in respect of the Report on Directors’ Remuneration:

Vote on Implementation of Remuneration Policy as below

For

Number

Against

Votes 
withheld

%

Number

%

Number

120,018,218

64.46

66,180,702

35.54

2,026,218

Vote on Remuneration Policy as below

For

Number

Against

Votes 
withheld

%

Number

%

Number

165,631,487

88.14

22,283,766

11.86

309,885

Notes:
(1)  Votes ‘For’ and ‘Against’ are expressed as a percentage of votes cast. 

A ‘Vote withheld’ is not a vote in law.

(2)  Votes ‘For’ includes those giving the Chairman discretion.

Shareholder voting at the 2014 AGM
At our AGM in 2014 although we received a high level of 
support for our Remuneration Policy, 35.5% of votes were 
cast against the implementation of our Remuneration Report.

Before our AGM some shareholders and their agents had 
expressed concern about the increase in base salary for our 
Finance Director that was implemented in 2013. This was a 
decision that was taken only after very careful consideration 
and after extensive consultation with shareholders. As a result 
we committed that his base pay would not be reviewed again 
until the expiry of the Remuneration Policy put in place at the 
2014 AGM at the earliest. The action we have taken this year 
with respect to the base salary of our Chief Executive is a 
demonstration of the serious consideration we give to 
shareholder views on this matter.

2015 AGM
Copies of the Executive Directors’ service agreements and the 
Non-executive Directors’ letters of appointment are available 
for inspection at the registered office of the Company during 
normal business hours and will be available for shareholders 
to view at the 2015 AGM.

Advice provided to the Remuneration 
Committee
PwC was appointed and is retained by the Committee as its 
principal and only material external adviser as a continuation 
of their earlier work on our Remuneration Policy. Their 
appointment is based on their expertise and knowledge of the 
Company. PwC advised on some aspects of our remuneration 
policy and practice. Fees payable to PwC during the year totaled 
£16,835 and the Committee are satisfied that these fees are 
appropriate for the work undertaken. PwC has advised the 
Company on remuneration issues for several years and the 
Remuneration Committee is satisfied that the other services 
provided by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP to the Company, 
which include tax advice and other associated services, do not 
affect their objectivity or independence.

Herbert Smith Freehills LLP was appointed by the Company to 
provide advice on law and regulation in relation to employee 
incentive matters. Herbert Smith Freehills LLP also provides 
general legal advice to the Company.

Outside directorships
Neither John Phizackerley nor Paul Mainwaring has any outside 
directorships from which they received any remuneration 
in 2014. 

Performance graph 
A graph depicting the Company’s total shareholder return 
in comparison to other companies in the FTSE 250 index 
(excluding investment trusts) in the six years to 31 December 
2014 is shown below:

400

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

Dec–2008

Dec–2009

Dec–2010

Dec–2011

Dec–2012

Dec–2013

Dec–2014

Tullett Prebon plc

FTSE 250 (excluding Investment Trusts)

The Board believes that the above index is most relevant as it 
comprises listed companies of similar size.

46  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
Chief Executive remuneration history

Year ended

Name

31 December 2014

John Phizackerley(1) 

Terry Smith(2)

31 December 2013

Terry Smith 

31 December 2012

Terry Smith

31 December 2011

Terry Smith

31 December 2010

Terry Smith

31 December 2009

Terry Smith

Notes:
(1)  For the 4 month period from 1 September 2014.
(2)  For the 8 month period from 1 January 2014 – 31 August 2014.
(3)  Variable remuneration was uncapped in the years 2009-2012.

Change in Chief Executive remuneration 

Chief Executive(1)

Senior Management 

Total 
Remuneration 
£’000

Annual Bonus 
% of max payout

LTIP
% of max vesting

720

433

2,856

3,153

4,929

4,344

4,652

n/a

n/a

51%

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

n/a

–

–

45%

–

–

% change
 Salary

% change
 Benefits

–

2%

–

–

% change 
in bonus 
payment

–

-10%

This table show the change of the Chief Executive’s fixed and variable remuneration compared to Senior Management.

Notes:
(1)   Neither John Phizackerley or the former Chief Executive have received a pay increase. 
(2)   Terry Smith did not receive a bonus for 2014. John Phizackerley received a prorated bonus from 1 September 2014.

A large proportion of the Group’s remuneration is payable to Brokers, who earn a significant proportion of their income as 
contractual bonus based on a formula linked to revenue. The Remuneration Committee considered that comparison of the 
Chief Executive’s remuneration with that of Senior Management would accordingly be more meaningful than comparison 
with all employees.

Relative importance of spend on remuneration 
The table below shows the expenditure and percentage change in overall spend on employee remuneration and dividend payments:

£m

Employee remuneration(1)

Shareholder dividends paid(2)

2014

490.4

36.7

2013

531.1

36.7

% change

-8%

–

Notes:
(1)  Employee remuneration includes employer’s social security costs and pension contributions.
(2)  Shareholder dividends comprises the dividends paid.

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  47

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
Report on Directors’ Remuneration continued

Implementation of Remuneration Policy 
in 2015
Following publication of the Annual Report in 2014 a 
statement was made on 29 April 2014 in respect of the 
Remuneration Policy for shareholder approval at the 2014 
AGM. The policy states that with respect to the maximum 
payable annual discretionary bonus “The maximum aggregate 
Executive Directors’ bonus is 3% of Group reported operating 
profit, rising to 5% in the event that one or more new 
Executive Directors are appointed. Operating profit may not 
exceed 150% of the operating profit used to calculate the 
previous year’s bonus. In exceptional circumstances payments 
may be made outside this range. Adjustments may be made 
in relation to significant acquisitions.”

The statement confirmed that this discretion will be used 
sparingly if ever. However, exceptional or genuinely unforeseen 
circumstances may arise in future and in those circumstances 
it may be in shareholders’ interests for the Company to put in 
place remuneration arrangements that are outside the terms 
of the Policy. It is emphasized that this discretion will only be 
used in very narrow circumstances – that is, in exceptional or 
genuinely unforeseen circumstances. The Committee considers 
that these circumstances will arise highly infrequently, if at all, 
in the lifetime of the Policy. The Committee will regard reliance 
on this discretion as a matter of utmost seriousness and, in 
relation to the stated obligation to consult in advance with 
major shareholders, will not proceed unless there was clear 
consensus in favour amongst those consulted. In any event the 
operating profit used to determine the aggregate bonus pool 
will not exceed 150% of the operating profit used to calculate 
the previous year’s bonus. 

During 2015 we intend to make additional changes to the 
way in which we implement our Remuneration Policy. These 
changes are within the terms of our existing approved policy. 
In future our Executive Directors will be set individual bonus 
targets within the current approved range of operating profits. 
Our Chief Executive will be entitled to receive a bonus of 
1.825 – 2.175% of reported operating profits and our Finance 
Director will be entitled to a bonus of 0.675- 0.825% of reported 
operating profits. The total bonus pool range of 2.5-3.0% is 
therefore unchanged. Within these ranges bonuses will be 
awarded according to individual performances measured 
against individual objectives. Individual performance targets 
will be disclosed retrospectively and will include delivery 
against strategic objectives, leadership, people development 
and culture. For commercial reasons it is not in the Company’s 
interests to disclose specific targets at this stage. The 
Committee believes that this change will enhance individual 
accountability and further align our Remuneration Policy with 
the Company’s strategy. 

Base salaries for our Chief Executive and Finance Director will 
remain unchanged in 2015.

In 2015 the Remuneration Committee expects to make a 
further LTIS award on the terms and with performance 
conditions as outlined in the Policy.

The policies set out in the Policy Table in the Remuneration 
Policy section of the Report on Directors’ Remuneration will 
apply in 2015. 

Approved by the Board and signed on its behalf by

Stephen Pull
Chairman 
Remuneration Committee 
3 March 2015

48  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report 
and the Financial Statements in accordance with applicable 
law and regulations. Company law requires the Directors to 
prepare financial statements for each financial year. Under 
that law the Directors are required to prepare financial 
statements for the Group in accordance with International 
Financial Reporting Standards (‘IFRS’) as adopted by the 
European Union and Article 4 of the IAS Regulation and have 
chosen to prepare the parent company financial statements 
in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice (‘UK GAAP’). Under company law the 
Directors must not approve the accounts unless they are 
satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the state of 
affairs of the Company and of the profit or loss of the 
Company for that period.

In the case of Group Financial Statements, International 
Accounting Standard 1 requires that Directors:

•  select and apply accounting policies properly;

•  present information, including accounting policies, in a 

manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable and 
understandable information;

•  provide additional disclosures when compliance with the 

specific requirements in IFRS is insufficient to enable users 
to understand the impact of particular transactions, other 
events and conditions on the entity’s financial position and 
financial performance; and

•  make an assessment of the Company’s ability to continue 

as a going concern.

In the case of the Parent Company Financial Statements, the 
Directors are required to:

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting 
records that are sufficient to show and explain the Company’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time 
the financial position of the Company and enable them to ensure 
that the Financial Statements comply with the Companies Act 
2006. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the 
Company and hence for taking reasonable steps for the 
prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and 
integrity of the corporate and financial information included 
on the Company’s website. Legislation in the United Kingdom 
governing the preparation and dissemination of financial 
statements differs from legislation in other jurisdictions.

Responsibility statement
The Directors confirm that to the best of their knowledge:

•  the Financial Statements, prepared in accordance with the 
relevant financial reporting framework, give a true and fair 
view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or 
loss of the Company and the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole;

•  the Strategic Report includes a fair review of the 

development and performance of the business and the 
position of the Company and the undertakings included in 
the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a 
description of the principal risks and uncertainties that they 
face; and

•  the Annual Report and Financial Statements, taken as a 

whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides 
the information necessary for shareholders to assess the 
Company’s performance, business model and strategy.

•  select suitable accounting policies and then apply them 

On behalf of the Board

consistently;

•  make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and 

prudent;

•  state whether applicable accounting standards have been 
followed, subject to any material departures disclosed and 
explained in the Financial Statements; and

•  prepare the Financial Statements on the going concern basis 
unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Company will 
continue in business.

John Phizackerley
Chief Executive
3 March 2015

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  49

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder InformationIndependent Auditor’s Report to the 
 Independent Auditor’s Report to the 
Members of Tullett Prebon plc
Members of Tullett Prebon plc 

Opinion on Financial Statements of Tullett Prebon plc 
In our opinion: 

•  the Financial Statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the Parent Company’s affairs as at 

31 December 2014 and of the Group’s and the Parent Company’s profit for the year then ended; 

•  the Group Financial Statements have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards 

(‘IFRSs’) as adopted by the European Union; 

•  the Parent Company Financial Statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted 

Accounting Practice; and 

•  the Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards 

the Group Financial Statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation. 

The Financial Statements comprise the Consolidated Income Statement, the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income, 
the Consolidated Balance Sheet, the Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity, the Consolidated Cash Flow Statement, the 
related Notes 1 to 38, the Parent Company Balance Sheet and related Notes 1 to 8. The financial reporting framework that has 
been applied in the preparation of the Group Financial Statements is applicable law and IFRSs as adopted by the European Union. 
The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the Parent Company Financial Statements is 
applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice). 

Going concern 
As required by the Listing Rules we have reviewed the Directors’ statement on page 26 that the Group is a going concern. 
We confirm that: 

•  we have concluded that the Directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the Financial 

Statements is appropriate; and 

•  we have not identified any material uncertainties that may cast significant doubt on the Group’s ability to continue as a 

going concern. 

However, because not all future events or conditions can be predicted, this statement is not a guarantee as to the Group’s ability 
to continue as a going concern. 

50  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
50 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
Our assessment of risks of material misstatement 
The assessed risks of material misstatement described below are those that had the greatest effect on our audit strategy, the 
allocation of resources in the audit and directing the efforts of the engagement team. 

Risks 
Acquisition of PVM Oil Associates Limited 
As detailed on page 93, the Group completed the acquisition of PVM 
Oil Associates Limited and its subsidiaries (‘PVM’) on 26 November 
2014. The acquisition has resulted in a number of areas of significant 
management judgement or accounting complexity, which include: 

•  the identification of £9.5m of separately identifiable acquired 

intangible assets; and 

•  the estimation of the fair value of assets and liabilities acquired 

and subsequent recognition of £51.7m of goodwill. 

Revenue recognition 
Matched Principal revenue 
As detailed in the summary of significant accounting policies on page 
61, Matched Principal brokerage revenue is the net proceeds from a 
commitment to simultaneously buy and sell financial instruments 
with counterparties, which is recognised on trade date. It accounts 
for approximately 20% of Group revenue. 

Given the high volume of transactions, robust internal controls 
over trade recording and settlement are important to ensure the 
completeness and accuracy of revenues. Most Matched Principal 
transactions settle within a standard market settlement period, which 
is typically within two to three business days. The risk of misstatement 
of revenues increases where trades fail to settle within the standard 
market settlement period. 
Name Passing revenue 
As detailed in the summary of significant accounting policies on page 
61, Name Passing revenue is earned for the service of matching of 
buyers and sellers of financial instruments. The counterparties to a 
transaction settle directly with each other and are invoiced for the 
service provided by the Group. It accounts for approximately 75% of 
Group revenue.  

As invoices for services provided are not issued until the end of the 
month, the cash collection period is typically longer than for Matched 
Principal revenue. As a result, the risk of misstatement of revenue 
increases where the invoice becomes past due and where post year 
end trade adjustments or credit notes arise. 

How the scope of our audit responded to the risk

We have audited management’s accounting for the acquisition, 
specifically focusing on the identification and fair valuation of the 
net assets acquired.  

Management appointed valuation specialists to assist with the 
identification and valuation of acquired intangible assets. We used 
our own internal valuation specialists to provide expert challenge to 
management’s assessment. This included particular focus on the 
completeness and valuation of separately identifiable intangible 
assets. 

We tested controls relating to trade recording, settlement and the 
recognition of revenue associated with Matched Principal transactions.

We selected a sample of trades which settled within standard 
settlement periods and confirmed each to cash receipts. For all open 
trades at year end which did not settle within the standard settlement 
period or where settlement failed, we confirmed trades to post year 
end confirmations to confirm the validity of the year end settlement 
debtors and creditors and accuracy of the associated revenue.  

We tested controls relating to Name Passing invoicing and cash 
collection. 

We confirmed a sample of trades to cash received throughout the 
year and a further sample of Name Passing transactions, which were 
outstanding at year end, to cash received post year end. We tested the 
aged debtor analysis through re-performance and, focusing on higher 
risk aged items, we confirmed that revenue recognised on the 
transaction was supportable by obtaining evidence to corroborate the 
validity of the underlying trade and reviewing communications with 
counterparties. We tested a selection of post year end trade 
adjustments and credit notes. 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  51
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 51

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of 
 Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of 
Tullett Prebon plc continued
Tullett Prebon plc continued 

Risks 
Impairment of goodwill and other intangibles 
As detailed in the summary of significant accounting policies on pages 
63 and 64, Note 13 on page 76 and Note 14 on page 77, goodwill and 
other intangible assets are reviewed for impairment at least annually. 
Determining whether the goodwill of £327.1m, other intangible assets 
of £20.1m and other intangible assets arising on consolidation of 
£9.5m are impaired requires an estimation of the recoverable amount 
of the Group’s cash-generating units (‘CGUs’), using the higher of the 
value in use or fair value less costs to sell.  

The value in use takes into account expected future cash flows, the 
selection of suitable discount rates and forecast future growth rates 
and is therefore inherently subjective. The value in use of all CGUs is 
sensitive to changes in underlying assumptions. 

The value in use method was used to assess the recoverable amount of 
each CGU. The fair value less costs to sell method was also used to 
assess the Brazil CGU, where an impairment of £6.8m was recorded in 
the year. 

Taxation 
As detailed in the summary of significant accounting policies on  
pages 66 and 67, the Group has taken account of tax issues that are 
subject to ongoing discussions with the relevant tax authorities in 
determining its current tax liability of £12.3m and deferred tax liability 
of £24.1m. An assessment of the likely outcome is required in 
determining the carrying value of tax liabilities. 

How the scope of our audit responded to the risk

We performed detailed analysis and challenge of management’s 
assumptions, in particular the cash flow projections and discount rates 
used by management in their impairment tests of the CGUs.  

We paid particular attention to the North American business, which 
has £57.5m of goodwill allocated, and the impairment of the carrying 
value of the Brazil business. These CGUs are more sensitive to changes 
in key assumptions as the headroom is lower in the North America 
CGU and such changes may impact the size of the impairment charge 
for the Brazil CGU. 

We challenged cash flow forecasts and growth rates by evaluating 
recent performance, trend analysis and comparing growth rates to 
those achieved historically and to external market data where 
available. Our internal valuations specialists independently derived 
discount rates which we compared to the rates used by management. 
We also benchmarked discount and growth rates to available external 
peer group data and considered the sensitivity of management’s 
impairment tests to changes in assumptions. 

We have challenged management’s assumptions in estimating the fair 
value less costs to sell, and hence the recoverable amount, of the Brazil 
CGU and we have independently considered the appropriateness of the 
impairment charge recorded.

Using our tax specialists, we assessed relevant developments in 
respect of each of the Group’s outstanding tax issues, including those 
arising from the acquisition of PVM. 

We have reviewed correspondence with the relevant tax authorities, 
challenged the judgements made by management and independently 
considered the likely outcomes and technical tax treatments to assess 
the reasonableness of the provisions made.  

The description of risks above should be read in conjunction with the financial reporting judgements considered by the Audit 
Committee discussed on pages 33 and 34. 

The only new risk in 2014 relates to the acquisition of PVM. In 2014, we have focused the risk relating to revenue recognition on 
Matched Principal and Name Passing revenues. These comprise the majority of the Group’s revenue and therefore have a higher 
risk of misstatement and the greatest effect on our audit strategy. 

Our audit procedures relating to these matters were designed in the context of our audit of the Financial Statements as a whole, 
and not to express an opinion on individual accounts or disclosures. Our opinion on the Financial Statements is not modified with 
respect to any of the risks described above, and we do not express an opinion on these individual matters. 

52  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
52 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Our application of materiality 
We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the Financial Statements that makes it probable that the economic 
decisions of a reasonably knowledgeable person would be changed or influenced. We use materiality both in planning the scope of 
our audit work and in evaluating the results of our work. 

We determined materiality for the Group to be £4.3m, which is based on 5% of underlying profit before tax of £86.6m and is below 
1% of equity. Prior year materiality was £8.4m, which was based on 10% of reported profit before tax and was below 3% of equity. 
The percentage of profit has been reduced to align more closely with the basis of materiality used by auditors of comparable 
listed companies. 

Underlying profit before tax has been determined by excluding exceptional and acquisition related items, which are detailed on 
page 71. These items have been excluded from our determination of materiality as they do not reflect the ongoing trading 
performance of the business. 

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to the Committee all audit differences in excess of £0.1m (2013: 
£0.2m), as well as differences below that threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. We also report to 
the Audit Committee on disclosure matters that we identified when assessing the overall presentation of the Financial Statements. 

An overview of the scope of our audit 
Our Group audit scope focused primarily on the audit of 23 subsidiaries in 11 locations (2013: 22 subsidiaries in 11 locations) 
which were deemed to be significant components. All of these were subject to a full audit. The only change to our audit scope is 
due to the acquisition of PVM and the inclusion of the main UK based trading entity of PVM as a new significant component.  

These 23 subsidiaries represent the principal business units within each of the three operating segments and account for 93% 
(2013: 94%) of the Group’s net assets, 96% (2013: 97%) of the Group’s revenue and 93% (2013: 95%) of the Group’s profit before 
tax. They were also selected to provide an appropriate basis for undertaking audit work to address the risks of material 
misstatement identified above. Our audit of each component was performed at a materiality appropriate to the relative scale of 
the business concerned. The materiality of each component ranged from £2.3m to £2.9m, which is lower than Group materiality. 

The Senior Statutory Auditor is directly responsible for the audit of all UK significant components and has responsibility for 
overseeing all aspects of the audit work of the component auditors in other locations. In discharging this responsibility, he visited 
the US twice and Singapore once during the audit to meet local management and oversee the audits of the components based in 
the Americas and Asia. The Group audit team maintains a dialogue with component auditors throughout all phases of the audit 
and receives written clearance memorandums from every significant component auditor setting out the results of their audit 
procedures. In addition the Group audit team performed analytical procedures over the aggregated financial information of the 
remaining components not subject to audit. 

Opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006 
In our opinion: 

•  the part of the Report on Directors’ Remuneration to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies 

Act 2006; and 

•  the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the Financial Statements 

are prepared is consistent with the Financial Statements. 

Matters on which we are required to report by exception 
Adequacy of explanations received and accounting records 
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion: 

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or 

•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the Parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been 

received from branches not visited by us; or 

•  the Parent Company Financial Statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns. 

We have nothing to report in respect of these matters. 

Directors’ remuneration 
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also required to report if in our opinion certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration  
have not been made or the part of the Report on Directors’ Remuneration to be audited is not in agreement with the accounting 
records and returns. We have nothing to report arising from these matters. 

Corporate Governance Statement 
Under the Listing Rules we are also required to review the part of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the Company’s 
compliance with ten provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code. We have nothing to report arising from our review. 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  53
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 53

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of 
 Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of 
Tullett Prebon plc continued
Tullett Prebon plc continued 

Our duty to read other information in the Annual Report 
Under International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland), we are required to report to you if, in our opinion, information  
in the Annual Report is: 

•  materially inconsistent with the information in the audited Financial Statements; or 

•  apparently materially incorrect based on, or materially inconsistent with, our knowledge of the Group acquired in the course  

of performing our audit; or 

•  otherwise misleading. 

In particular, we are required to consider whether we have identified any inconsistencies between our knowledge acquired during 
the audit and the Directors’ statement that they consider the Annual Report is fair, balanced and understandable and whether the 
Annual Report appropriately discloses those matters that we communicated to the Audit Committee which we consider should 
have been disclosed. We confirm that we have not identified any such inconsistencies or misleading statements. 

Respective responsibilities of directors and auditor 
As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities, the Directors are responsible for the preparation of the 
Financial Statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit and express an 
opinion on the Financial Statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland). 
Those standards require us to comply with the Auditing Practices Board’s Ethical Standards for Auditors. We also comply with 
International Standard on Quality Control 1 (UK and Ireland). Our audit methodology and tools aim to ensure that our quality 
control procedures are effective, understood and applied. Our quality controls and systems include our dedicated professional 
standards review team and independent partner reviews. 

This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 
2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to 
state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume 
responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for 
the opinions we have formed. 

Scope of the audit of the Financial Statements 
An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the Financial Statements sufficient to give reasonable 
assurance that the Financial Statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. This includes an 
assessment of: whether the accounting policies are appropriate to the Group’s and the Parent Company’s circumstances and have 
been consistently applied and adequately disclosed; the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by the Directors; 
and the overall presentation of the Financial Statements. In addition, we read all the financial and non-financial information in 
the Annual Report to identify material inconsistencies with the audited Financial Statements and to identify any information 
that is apparently materially incorrect based on, or materially inconsistent with, the knowledge acquired by us in the course 
of performing the audit. If we become aware of any apparent material misstatements or inconsistencies we consider the 
implications for our report. 

Robert Topley F.C.A.  
(Senior Statutory Auditor) 
for and on behalf of Deloitte LLP 
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditor 
London 
United Kingdom 
3 March 2015 

54  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
54 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
Consolidated Income Statement
 Consolidated Income Statement 

for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

2014 

Revenue  

Administrative expenses 

Other operating income  

Operating profit 

Finance income 

Finance costs 

Profit before tax 

Taxation 

Profit of consolidated companies 

Share of results of associates 

Profit for the year 

Attributable to: 

Equity holders of the parent 

Minority interests 

Earnings per share  

– Basic 

– Diluted 

2013  

Revenue 

Administrative expenses 

Other operating income 

Operating profit 

Finance income 

Finance costs 

Profit before tax 

Taxation  

Profit of consolidated companies  

Share of results of associates  

Profit for the year  

Attributable to: 

Equity holders of the parent 

Minority interests 

Earnings per share  

– Basic 

– Diluted 

Exceptional 
and 
acquisition 
 related items 
£m 

Notes

Underlying 
£m 

– 

(69.1)

16.0 

(53.1)

– 

– 

(53.1)

6.5 

(46.6)

– 

(46.6)

(46.6)

– 

(46.6)

– 

(15.2)

– 

(15.2)

– 

– 

(15.2)

2.4 

(12.8)

– 

(12.8)

(12.8)

– 

(12.8)

4

6

5

8

9

10

6

11

11

4

6

5

8

9

10

6

11

11

703.5 

(607.9) 

5.1 

100.7 

3.6 

(17.7) 

86.6 

(16.9) 

69.7 

1.9 

71.6 

71.2 

0.4 

71.6 

32.3p 

32.3p 

803.7 

(699.3) 

11.0 

115.4 

3.7 

(19.5) 

99.6 

(22.4) 

77.2 

1.4 

78.6 

78.4 

0.2 

78.6 

36.0p 

36.0p 

Total
£m

703.5

(677.0)

21.1

47.6

3.6

(17.7)

33.5

(10.4)

23.1

1.9

25.0

24.6

0.4

25.0

11.2p

11.2p

803.7

(714.5)

11.0

100.2

3.7

(19.5)

84.4

(20.0)

64.4

1.4

65.8

65.6

0.2

65.8

30.1p

30.1p

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  55
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 55

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement of 
 Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income
Comprehensive Income 

for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

Profit for the year 

Items that will not be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss:

Remeasurement of the defined benefit pension scheme 

Taxation charge relating to items not reclassified 

Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss:

Revaluation of investments  

Effect of changes in exchange rates on translation of foreign operations

Taxation (charge)/credit relating to items that may be reclassified

Other comprehensive income for the year 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Attributable to: 

Equity holders of the parent 

Minority interests 

Notes 

34 

10 

10 

2014 
£m 

25.0 

10.0 

(3.5)

6.5 

(0.5)

7.7 

(0.2)

7.0 

13.5 

38.5 

37.8 

0.7 

38.5 

2013
£m 

65.8

7.2

(2.5)

4.7

(0.5)

(7.8)

0.2

(8.1)

(3.4)

62.4

62.5

(0.1)

62.4

56  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
56 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Balance Sheet
 Consolidated Balance Sheet

as at 31 December 2014
as at 31 December 2014 

Non-current assets 

Intangible assets arising on consolidation 

Other intangible assets 

Property, plant and equipment 

Interest in associates 

Investments 

Deferred tax assets 

Defined benefit pension scheme 

Current assets 

Trade and other receivables 

Financial assets 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Total assets 

Current liabilities 

Trade and other payables 

Interest bearing loans and borrowings

Current tax liabilities 

Short term provisions 

Net current assets 

Non-current liabilities 

Interest bearing loans and borrowings

Deferred tax liabilities 

Long term provisions 

Other long term payables 

Total liabilities 

Net assets 

Equity 

Share capital 

Share premium 

Merger reserve 

Other reserves 

Retained earnings 

Equity attributable to equity holders of the parent 

Minority interests 

Total equity  

Notes 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

19 

34 

20 

18 

31 

21 

22 

23 

22 

19 

23 

24 

26 

27(a) 

27(a) 

27(b) 

27(c) 

27(c) 

27(c) 

2014 
£m 

336.6 

20.1 

29.4 

5.0 

5.2 

2.3 

62.1 

460.7 

2013 
£m

275.6

21.8

28.8

4.0

5.7

2.9

50.5

389.3

3,261.9 

5,820.2

10.7 

287.1 

3,559.7 

4,020.4 

31.2

251.6

6,103.0

6,492.3

(3,269.2)

(5,812.7)

– 

(12.3)

(6.6)

(8.5)

(19.3)

(1.8)

(3,288.1)

(5,842.3)

271.6 

260.7

(219.7)

(219.1)

(24.1)

(9.7)

(15.3)

(268.8)

(3,556.9)

463.5 

60.9 

17.1 

178.5 

(1,173.4)

1,378.8 

461.9 

1.6 

463.5 

(17.9)

(4.3)

(10.3)

(251.6)

(6,093.9)

398.4

54.4

17.1

121.5

(1,180.1)

1,383.4

396.3

2.1

398.4

The Consolidated Financial Statements of Tullett Prebon plc (registered number 5807599) were approved by the Board of Directors 
and authorised for issue on 3 March 2015 and are signed on its behalf by

John Phizackerley 
Chief Executive 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  57
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 57

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
Consolidated Statement of Changes 
 Consolidated Statement of Changes
in Equity
in Equity  

for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

Equity attributable to equity holders of the parent 

Share 
capital 
£m 

Share 
premium 
account 
£m 

Merger 
reserve 
£m 

Reverse 
acquisition 
reserve 
£m

Re-
valuation 
reserve  
£m

Hedging 
and 
translation 
£m

Own  
shares 
£m

Retained 
earnings 
£m 

Total 
£m 

Minority 
interests 
£m

Total equity 
£m

2014 

Balance at 
1 January 2014 

Profit for the year 

Other 
comprehensive 
income for the year 

Total 
comprehensive 
income for the year 

Dividends paid 

Issue of ordinary 
shares 

Share issue costs 

Decrease in 
minority interests 

Credit arising on 
share-based 
payment awards 

Balance at  
31 December 2014 

2013 

Balance at 
1 January 2013 

Profit for the year 

Other 
comprehensive 
income for the year 

Total 
comprehensive 
income for the year 

Dividends paid 

Credit arising on 
share-based 
payment awards 

Balance at  
31 December 2013 

54.4 

17.1 

121.5 

(1,182.3)

– 

– 

– 

– 

6.5 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

58.4 

(1.4) 

– 

– 

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

1.9

–

0.4

–

(0.5)

7.2

(0.5)

7.2

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

(0.1)

1,383.4 

24.6 

396.3 

24.6 

2.1

0.4

398.4

25.0

6.5 

13.2 

0.3

13.5

31.1 

(36.7) 

– 

– 

37.8 

(36.7) 

64.9 

(1.4) 

0.7

(0.2)

–

–

38.5

(36.9)

64.9

(1.4)

(0.2) 

(0.2) 

(1.0)

(1.2)

1.2 

1.2 

–

1.2

60.9 

17.1 

178.5 

(1,182.3)

1.4

7.6

(0.1)

1,378.8 

461.9 

1.6

463.5

54.4 

17.1 

121.5 

(1,182.3)

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

–

–

–

–

–

2.4

–

7.7

–

(0.5)

(7.3)

(0.5)

(7.3)

–

–

–

–

(0.1)

1,348.8 

65.6 

369.5 

65.6 

2.5

0.2

372.0

65.8

4.7 

(3.1) 

(0.3)

(3.4)

70.3 

(36.7) 

62.5 

(36.7) 

(0.1)

(0.3)

62.4

(37.0)

1.0 

1.0 

–

1.0

54.4 

17.1 

121.5 

(1,182.3)

1.9

0.4

(0.1)

1,383.4 

396.3 

2.1

398.4

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

58  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
58 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Cash Flow Statement
 Consolidated Cash Flow Statement 

for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

Net cash from operating activities 

Investing activities 

Sale/(purchase) of financial assets 

Interest received 

Dividends from associates 

Expenditure on intangible fixed assets

Purchase of property, plant and equipment 

Investment in subsidiaries  

Cash acquired with the acquisition of PVM 

Net cash arising from investment activities 

Financing activities 

Dividends paid 

Dividends paid to minority interests 

Equity issue costs 

Repayment of debt 

Debt issue and bank facility arrangement costs 

Net cash used in financing activities

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the year 

Effect of foreign exchange rate changes

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year 

Notes 

30 

2014 
£m 

52.8 

20.6 

1.5 

1.0 

(5.3)

(5.7)

(5.5)

17.5 

24.1 

12 

(36.7)

(0.2)

(1.4)

(8.5)

– 

(46.8)

2013 
£m

62.1

(1.9)

1.9

1.0

(6.7)

(10.4)

(2.3)

–

(18.4)

(36.7)

(0.3)

–

(30.0)

(1.7)

(68.7)

30.1 

(25.0)

251.6 

281.5

31 

5.4 

287.1 

(4.9)

251.6

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  59
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 59

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
Notes to the Consolidated 
 Consolidated Cash flow Statement 
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements
Financial Statements 

for the year ended 31 December 2014 

for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

The results of subsidiaries acquired or disposed of during the 
year are included in the Consolidated Income Statement from 
the effective date of acquisition or up to the effective date of 
disposal, as appropriate. Where necessary, adjustments are 
made to the financial statements of subsidiaries to bring 
the accounting policies used into line with those used by the 
Group. All inter-company transactions, balances, income 
and expenses are eliminated on consolidation. 

Non-controlling interests, also referred to as minority 
interests, in subsidiaries are identified separately from the 
Group’s equity therein. Those interests of non-controlling 
shareholders that are present ownership interests entitling 
their holders to a proportionate share of net assets upon 
liquidation may initially be measured at fair value or at the 
non-controlling interests’ proportionate share of the fair value 
of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets. Other non-controlling 
interests are initially measured at fair value. The choice of 
measurement is made on an acquisition by acquisition basis. 
Subsequent to acquisition, the carrying amount of non-
controlling interests is the amount of those interests at initial 
recognition plus the non-controlling interests’ share of 
subsequent changes in equity. Total comprehensive income is 
attributed to non-controlling interests even if this results in 
the non-controlling interest having a deficit balance.  

Changes in the Group’s interests in subsidiaries that do 
not result in a loss of control are accounted for as equity 
transactions. The carrying amount of the Group’s interests 
and the non-controlling interests are adjusted to reflect  
the changes in their relative interests in the subsidiaries.  
Any differences between the amount by which the non-
controlling interests are adjusted and the fair value of  
the consideration paid or received is recognised directly  
in equity and attributed to the owners of the Company. 

When the Group loses control of a subsidiary, the profit or 
loss on disposal is calculated as the difference between (i) 
the aggregate of the fair value of the consideration received 
and the fair value of any retained interest and (ii) the previous 
carrying amount of the assets, including goodwill, less 
liabilities of the subsidiary and any non-controlling interests. 
Amounts previously recognised in other comprehensive 
income in relation to the subsidiary are accounted for in the 
same manner as would be required if the relevant assets or 
liabilities are disposed of. The fair value of any investment 
retained in the former subsidiary at the date when control 
was lost is regarded as the fair value on initial recognition for 
subsequent accounting under IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: 
Recognition and Measurement’ or, when applicable, the cost 
on initial recognition of an investment in an associate or 
jointly controlled entity. 

1. General information
Tullett Prebon plc is a company incorporated in England and 
Wales under the Companies Act. The address of the registered 
office is given on page 109. The nature of the Group’s 
operations and its principal activities are set out in the 
Directors’ Report on pages 25 to 27 and in the Strategic 
Report on pages 4 to 23. 

2. Basis of preparation
(a) Basis of accounting 
The Group Financial Statements have been prepared in 
accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards 
(‘IFRSs’) adopted by the European Union and comply with 
Article 4 of the EU IAS Regulation. 

The Financial Statements have been prepared on the historical 
cost basis, except for the revaluation of certain financial 
instruments. As discussed on page 26 of the Directors’ Report, 
the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group 
has adequate resources to continue in operational existence 
for the foreseeable future. Accordingly, the going concern 
basis continues to be used in preparing these Financial 
Statements. 

For financial reporting purposes, fair value measurements are 
categorised into Level 1, 2 or 3 based on the degree to which 
inputs to the fair value measurements are observable and the 
significance of the inputs to the fair value measurement in its 
entirety, which are described as follows: 

• Level 1 inputs are quoted prices (unadjusted) in active 

markets for identical assets or liabilities; 

• Level 2 inputs are inputs, other than quoted prices included 
within Level 1, that are observable for the asset or liability, 
either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from 
prices); and

• Level 3 inputs are unobservable inputs for the asset 

or liability. 

The Financial Statements are presented in Pounds sterling 
because that is the currency of the primary economic 
environment in which the Group operates and are rounded to 
the nearest hundred thousand (expressed as millions to one 
decimal place – £m), except where otherwise indicated. The 
significant accounting policies are set out in Note 3. 

(b) Basis of consolidation 
The Group Consolidated Financial Statements incorporate the 
Financial Statements of the Company and entities controlled 
by the Company made up to 31 December each year. Under 
IFRS 10 ‘Consolidated Financial Statements’, which has been 
adopted in 2014 (see below) control is achieved where the 
Company exercises power over an entity, is exposed to, or has 
rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity 
and has the ability to use its power to affect the returns from 
the entity. Previously, control was defined as the power to 
govern the financial and operating policies of an entity so as 
to obtain benefits from its activities. 

60  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
60 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
(c) Adoption of new and revised Standards 
The following new and revised Standards and Interpretations 
have been adopted in the current year although their 
adoption has not had any significant impact on the 
Financial Statements: 

• The Group has adopted a package of four standards 
on consolidation, joint arrangements, associates and 
disclosures comprising IFRS 10 ‘Consolidated Financial 
Statements’, IFRS 11 ‘Joint Arrangements’, IFRS 12 
‘Disclosures of Interests in Other Entities’, and IAS 28 (as 
revised in 2011) ‘Investments in Associates and Joint 
Ventures’. Subsequent to the issue of these standards, 
amendments to IFRS 10, 11 and 12 were issued to clarify 
certain transitional guidance on first time application 
of the standards; 

• Amendments to IAS 32 ‘Financial Instruments: Presentation’ 
regarding offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities; 

• Amendments to IAS 36 ‘Impairment of assets’ regarding 
recoverable amount disclosures for non-financial assets; 
and 

• Amendments to IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition 
and Measurement’ regarding the novation of derivatives 
and continuation of hedge accounting. 

At the date of authorisation of these Financial Statements, the 
following EU endorsed Standards and Interpretations were in 
issue but not yet effective. The Group has not applied these 
Standards or Interpretations in the preparation of these 
Financial Statements: 

• Annual Improvements to IFRSs 2010-2012 Cycle; and

• Annual Improvements to IFRSs 2011-2013 Cycle.

The following Standards and Interpretations have not been 
endorsed by the EU and have not been applied in the 
preparation of these Financial Statements: 

• IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’; 

• IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’; 

• Amendments to IAS 1 ‘Presentation of financial statements’ 

regarding disclosures; 

• Annual Improvements to IFRSs 2012-2014 Cycle; 

• Amendments to IAS 16 and IAS 38 clarification of acceptable 

methods of depreciation and amortisation; and 

• Amendments to IFRS 11 regarding the accounting for 

acquisition of interests in Joint Operations. 

The adoption of IFRS 9 will impact both the measurement and 
disclosures of financial instruments but it is not practicable 
to provide a complete estimate of its effect until a detailed 
review has been completed prior to implementation. The 
Directors do not expect the adoption of the other Standards 
and Interpretations will have a material impact on the Financial 
Statements of the Group in future periods. 

3. Summary of significant accounting policies
(a) Income recognition 
Revenue, which excludes sales taxes, includes gross 
commissions, brokerage, fees earned and subscriptions for 
information sales. Fee income is recognised when the related 
services are completed and the income is considered receivable.  

Revenue comprises: 

(i)  Name Passing brokerage, where counterparties to a 

transaction settle directly with each other. Revenue for 
the service of matching buyers and sellers of financial 
instruments is stated net of sales taxes, rebates and 
discounts and is recognised in full on trade date;  

(ii)  Matched Principal brokerage revenue, being the net 
proceeds from a commitment to simultaneously buy 
and sell financial instruments with counterparties, is 
recognised on trade date; 

(iii)  Executing Broker brokerage, where the Group executes 
transactions on certain regulated exchanges, and then 
‘gives-up’ the trade to the relevant client, or its clearing 
member. Revenue for the service of matching buyers and 
sellers of financial instruments is stated net of sales 
taxes, rebates and discounts and is recognised in full 
on trade date; and 

(iv)  Fees earned from the sales of price information from 

financial and commodity markets to third parties is 
recognised on an accruals basis. 

Interest income is accrued on a time basis, by reference 
to the principal outstanding and at the effective interest 
rate applicable. Dividend income from investments is 
recognised when the Group’s right to receive the payment 
is established. 

(b) Business combinations 
Acquisitions of subsidiaries and businesses are accounted for 
using the acquisition method. The consideration for each 
acquisition is measured at the aggregate of the fair values 
(at the date of exchange) of assets given, liabilities incurred 
or assumed, and equity instruments issued by the Group in 
exchange for control of the acquiree. Acquisition costs are 
recognised in profit or loss as incurred. 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  61
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 61

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
Notes to the Consolidated  
 Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

3. Summary of significant accounting policies
continued
Where applicable, the consideration for the acquisition 
includes any asset or liability resulting from a contingent 
consideration arrangement, measured at its acquisition 
date fair value. Subsequent changes in such fair values 
are adjusted against the cost of the acquisition where 
they qualify as measurement period adjustments. The 
measurement period is the period from the date of acquisition 
to the date the Group obtains complete information about the 
facts and circumstances that existed as of the acquisition 
date, and is subject to a maximum of one year. All subsequent 
changes in the fair value of contingent consideration classified 
as an asset or a liability are accounted for in accordance with 
relevant IFRSs. Changes in the fair value of contingent 
consideration classified as equity are not recognised. 

Where a business combination is achieved in stages, the 
Group’s previously held interests in the acquired entity  
are remeasured to fair value at the acquisition date and  
any resulting gain or loss is recognised in profit or loss. Amounts 
arising from interests in the acquiree prior to the acquisition 
that have previously been recognised in other comprehensive 
income are reclassified to profit or loss, where such treatment 
would be appropriate if that interest was disposed of. 

The acquiree’s identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent 
liabilities that meet the conditions for recognition under IFRS 
3 (2008) are recognised at their fair value at the acquisition 
date, except that: 

• deferred tax assets or liabilities are recognised and 

measured in accordance with IAS 12 ‘Income Taxes’; 

• liabilities or assets related to employee benefit 

arrangements are recognised and measured in accordance 
with IAS 19 ‘Employee Benefits’; 

• acquiree share-based payment awards replaced by Group 
awards are measured in accordance with IFRS 2 ‘Share-
based Payments’; and 

• assets or disposal groups that are classified for sale are 

measured in accordance with IFRS 5 ‘Non-Current Assets 
Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations’. 

If the initial accounting for a business combination is 
incomplete by the end of the reporting period in which  
the business combination occurs, provisional amounts are 
reported. Those provisional amounts are adjusted during 
the measurement period, or additional assets or liabilities 
recognised, to reflect the facts and circumstances that existed 
as at the acquisition date. 

(c) Investment in associates 
An associate is an entity over which the Group is in a position 
to exercise significant influence. Significant influence is the 
power to participate in the financial and operating decisions 
of the investee but is not control or joint control over these 
policies. 

The results and assets and liabilities of associates are 
incorporated in these Financial Statements using the equity 
method of accounting except when classified as held for sale. 
Investments in associates are carried in the balance sheet at 
cost as adjusted by post-acquisition changes in the Group’s 
share of the net assets of the associate, less any impairment in 
the value of individual investments. Losses of the associates in 
excess of the Group’s interest in those associates are 
recognised only to the extent that the Group has incurred 
legal or constructive obligations or made payments on behalf 
of the associate. 

Any excess of the cost of acquisition over the Group’s  
share of the fair values of the identifiable net assets of the 
associate at the date of acquisition is recognised as goodwill. 
Any discount in the cost of acquisition below the Group’s 
share of the fair value of the identifiable net assets of 
the associate at the date of acquisition (i.e. discount on 
acquisition) is credited to profit and loss in the year of 
acquisition. 

Where a Group company transacts with an associate of  
the Group, profits and losses are eliminated to the extent  
of the Group’s interest in the relevant associate. Losses may 
provide evidence of impairment of the asset transferred in 
which case appropriate provision is made for impairment. 

(d) Interests in joint venture arrangements 
A joint venture arrangement is a contractual arrangement 
whereby the Group and other parties undertake an economic 
activity that is subject to joint control. 

Joint venture arrangements, which involve the establishment 
of a separate entity in which each party has an interest, are 
referred to as jointly controlled entities. The Group reports its 
interests in jointly controlled entities using the equity method 
of accounting. Investments in joint ventures are carried in the 
balance sheet at cost as adjusted by post-acquisition changes 
in the Group’s share of the net assets of the joint venture, less 
any impairment in the value of individual investments. Losses 
of the joint venture in excess of the Group’s interest in those 
joint ventures are recognised only to the extent that the 
Group has incurred legal or constructive obligations or made 
payments under the terms of the joint venture. 

62  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
62 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
Acquired separately or from a business combination 
Intangible assets acquired separately are capitalised at cost 
and intangible assets acquired in a business acquisition are 
capitalised at fair value at the date of acquisition. The useful 
lives of these intangible assets are assessed to be either finite 
or indefinite. Amortisation charged on assets with a finite 
useful life is taken to the income statement through ‘other 
administrative expenses’. 

Other than software development costs, intangible 
assets created within the business are not capitalised and 
expenditure is charged to the income statement in the year 
in which the expenditure is incurred. 

Intangible assets are amortised over their finite useful lives 
generally on a straight-line basis, as follows: 

Software: 
Purchased or developed 

– up to 5 years 

Software licences 

– over the period of the licence 

Acquisition intangibles: 

Brand/Trade marks 

– up to 5 years

Customer relationships  

– 2 to 10 years

Other intangibles 

– over the period of the contract

Intangible assets are subject to impairment review if there are 
events or changes in circumstances that indicate that the 
carrying amount may not be recoverable. 

Gains or losses arising from derecognition of an intangible 
asset are measured as the difference between the net disposal 
proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset and are 
recognised in the income statement when the asset is 
derecognised. 

(e) Goodwill 
Goodwill arising on consolidation represents the excess of the 
cost of acquisition over the Group’s interest in the fair value of 
the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities of a 
subsidiary or associate at the date of acquisition. Goodwill is 
initially recognised at cost and is subsequently measured at 
cost less any accumulated impairment losses. Goodwill arising 
on acquisitions before the date of transition to IFRS has been 
retained at the previous UK GAAP amounts at that date. 

Goodwill recognised as an asset is reviewed for impairment 
at least annually. Any impairment loss is recognised as an 
expense immediately and is not subsequently reversed. For 
the purpose of impairment testing goodwill is allocated to each 
of the Group’s cash-generating units expected to benefit from 
the synergies of the combination. Cash-generating units to 
which goodwill has been allocated are tested for impairment 
annually, or more frequently when there is an indication that 
the unit may be impaired. If the recoverable amount of the 
cash-generating unit is less than the carrying amount of any 
goodwill allocated to the unit, the impairment loss is allocated 
first to reduce the carrying amount of any goodwill allocated to 
the unit and then to the other assets of the unit pro rata on the 
basis of the carrying amount of each asset in the unit. 

Goodwill arising on the acquisition of an associate is included 
within the carrying value of the associate. Goodwill arising on 
the acquisition of subsidiaries is presented separately in the 
balance sheet.  

On disposal of a subsidiary, associate or jointly controlled 
entity, the attributable amount of goodwill is included in the 
determination of the profit or loss on disposal.  

The interest of minority shareholders in the acquired entity 
is initially measured at the minority’s proportion of the 
net fair value of the assets, liabilities and contingent 
liabilities recognised. 

(f) Intangible assets 
Software and software development costs 
An internally-generated intangible asset arising from the 
Group’s software development is recognised at cost only  
if all of the following conditions are met: 

• an asset is created that can be identified; 

• it is probable that the asset created will generate future 

economic benefits; and 

• the development costs of the asset can be measured 

reliably. 

Where the above conditions are not met, costs are expensed 
as incurred.  

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  63
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 63

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
If the recoverable amount of an asset (or cash-generating 
unit) is estimated to be less than its carrying amount, the 
carrying amount of the asset (or cash-generating unit) 
is reduced to its recoverable amount. Impairment losses 
are recognised as an expense immediately. Where an 
impairment loss subsequently reverses, the carrying amount 
of the asset (or cash-generating unit) is increased to the 
revised estimate of its recoverable amount, but so that the 
increased carrying amount does not exceed the carrying 
amount that would have been determined had no impairment 
loss been recognised for the asset (or cash-generating unit) in 
prior years. A reversal of an impairment loss is recognised as 
income immediately, unless the relevant asset is carried at a 
re-valued amount, in which case the reversal of the 
impairment loss is treated as a revaluation increase. 

(i) Broker contract payments 
Payments made to brokers under employment contracts 
which are in advance of the expected economic benefit due 
to the Group are accounted for as prepayments and included 
within trade and other receivables. Payments made in 
advance are subject to repayment conditions during the 
contract period and the prepayment is amortised over the 
shorter of the contract term and the period the payment 
remains recoverable. Amounts that are irrecoverable, or 
become irrecoverable, are written off immediately. These 
prepayments are subject to annual review. 

Payments made in arrears are accrued and are included within 
trade and other payables. 

(j) Financial assets and financial liabilities 
Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised  
on the Group’s balance sheet when the Group has become  
a party to the contractual provisions of the instrument.  

Financial instruments are derecognised when all 
derecognition criteria of IAS 39 are met and the Group no 
longer controls the contractual rights that comprise the 
financial instrument. This is normally the case when the 
instrument is sold, or all of the cash flows attributable to the 
instrument are passed through to an independent third party. 

Financial assets are classified on initial recognition as 
‘available-for-sale’, ‘loans and receivables’ or ‘at fair value 
through the income statement’. Financial liabilities are 
classified on initial recognition as either ‘at fair value through 
the income statement’ or as ‘other financial liabilities’. 

Notes to the Consolidated  
 Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

3. Summary of significant accounting policies
continued
(g) Property, plant and equipment 
Freehold land is stated at cost. Buildings, furniture,  
fixtures, equipment and motor vehicles are stated at  
cost less accumulated depreciation and any recognised 
impairment loss. 

Depreciation is provided on all tangible fixed assets at rates 
calculated to write off the cost, less estimated residual value 
based on prices prevailing at the date of acquisition, of each 
asset on a straight-line basis over its expected useful life 
as follows: 

Furniture, fixtures, equipment  
and motor vehicles 

Short and long leasehold land  
and buildings 

– 3 to 10 years 

– period of the lease 

Freehold land 

Freehold buildings 

– infinite 

– 50 years 

Assets held under finance leases are depreciated over their 
expected useful lives on the same basis as owned assets or, 
where shorter, the term of the relevant lease. 

The gain or loss arising on the disposal or retirement of  
an asset is determined as the difference between the sales 
proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset and is 
recognised in income. 

(h) Impairment of tangible and intangible assets 
excluding goodwill 
At each balance sheet date, the Group reviews the carrying 
amounts of its tangible and intangible assets with finite lives 
to determine whether there is any indication that those assets 
have suffered an impairment loss. If any such indication 
exists, the recoverable amount of the asset is estimated in 
order to determine the extent of the impairment loss. Where 
the asset does not generate cash flows that are independent 
from other assets, the Group estimates the recoverable 
amount of the cash-generating unit to which the asset 
belongs. Intangible assets with indefinite useful lives are 
tested for impairment annually and whenever there is an 
indication that the asset may be impaired. 

Recoverable amount is the higher of fair value less any cost to 
sell and value in use. In assessing value in use, the estimated 
future cash flows are discounted to their present values using 
a pre-tax discount rate that reflects current market 
assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific 
to the asset. 

64  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
64 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
Available-for-sale  
The Group’s investment in equity securities and certain 
debt securities are classified as available-for-sale financial 
assets. Subsequent to initial recognition, they are measured 
at fair value and changes therein, other than impairment 
losses and foreign exchange gains and losses on available- 
for-sale monetary items, are recognised directly in other 
comprehensive income. For equity financial assets, where 
the fair value cannot be reliably measured, the assets are 
held at cost less any provision for impairment. These assets 
are generally expected to be held for the long term and are 
included in non-current assets. Assets such as holdings in 
exchanges, cash related instruments and long term equity 
investments that do not qualify as associates or joint ventures 
are classified as available-for-sale. When an investment is 
derecognised, the cumulative gain or loss in other 
comprehensive income is transferred to profit or loss. 

Loans and receivables 
Loans and receivables are non-derivative financial instruments 
that have fixed or determinable payments that are not listed 
in an active market. Loans and receivables are measured at 
amortised cost using the effective interest method, less any 
impairment. Interest income is recognised using the effective 
interest rate, except for short term receivables when the 
recognition of interest would be immaterial. Settlement 
balances, trade receivables, loans and other receivables are 
classified as ‘loans and receivables’. 

Fair value through the income statement 
Financial assets and liabilities can be designated at fair value 
through the income statement where they meet specific 
criteria set out in IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition 
and Measurement’ or where assets or liabilities are held for 
trading. Subsequent changes in fair value are recognised 
directly in the income statement. 

Other financial liabilities  
Other financial liabilities, including borrowings, are initially 
measured at fair value, net of transaction costs, and are 
subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective 
interest method, with interest expense recognised on an 
effective yield basis. 

Financial assets, other than those at fair value through the 
income statement, are assessed for indicators of impairment 
at each balance sheet date. Financial assets are impaired 
where there is objective evidence that, as a result of one or 
more events that occurred after the initial recognition of 
the financial asset, the estimated future cash flows of the 
investment have been impacted. Impairment is recognised 
in the income statement. 

(k) Derivative financial instruments 
From time to time, the Group uses derivative financial 
instruments such as foreign currency contracts and interest 
rate swaps to manage its risks associated with interest rate 
and foreign currency fluctuations. The Group does not use 
derivative financial instruments for speculative purposes.  

Derivatives are initially recognised at fair value at the date 
a derivative contract is entered into and are subsequently 
remeasured to their fair value at each balance sheet date. 
The resulting gain or loss is recognised immediately unless 
the derivative is designated and effective as a hedging 
instrument, in which event the timing of the recognition in 
profit or loss depends on the nature of the hedge relationship. 
The Group designates certain derivatives as either hedges 
of the fair value of recognised assets or liabilities or 
firm commitments (fair value hedges) or hedges of net 
investments in foreign operations. The Group has not 
designated any derivatives as hedges of probable forecast 
transactions or hedges of foreign currency risk of firm 
commitments (cash flow hedges). 

The fair value of forward exchange contracts and interest rate 
swaps is calculated on a discounted cash flow basis using 
relevant market data on foreign exchange and interest rates. 

A derivative is presented as a non-current asset or a non-
current liability if the remaining maturity of the instrument is 
more than 12 months and it is not expected to be realised or 
settled within 12 months. Other derivatives are presented as 
current assets or current liabilities. 

(l) Hedge accounting 
From time to time, the Group uses derivatives as either 
‘fair value hedges’ or ‘hedges of net investments in 
foreign operations’. 

Fair value hedges  
Changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated 
and qualify as fair value hedges are recorded in profit or loss 
immediately, together with any changes in the fair value of 
the hedged item that is attributable to the hedged risk. The 
changes in the fair value of the hedging instrument and the 
changes in the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk are 
recognised in the line of the income statement relating to the 
hedged item. 

Hedge accounting is discontinued when the Group revokes 
the hedging relationship, the hedging instrument expires or is 
sold, terminated, or exercised, or no longer qualifies for hedge 
accounting. The adjustment to the carrying amount of the 
hedged item arising from the hedged risk is amortised to 
profit or loss from that date. 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  65
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 65

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
Notes to the Consolidated  
 Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

3. Summary of significant accounting policies
continued
Net investment hedges  
The effective portion of changes in the fair value of 
derivatives that are designated and qualify as net investment 
hedges is recognised in the hedging and translation reserve 
in other comprehensive income. The gain or loss relating to 
the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in profit 
or loss, and is included in financial income or financial 
expense respectively. 

Gains and losses deferred in the hedging and translation 
reserve are recognised in profit or loss on disposal of the 
foreign operation. 

(m) Settlement balances 
Certain Group companies engage in Matched Principal brokerage 
whereby securities are bought from one counterparty and 
simultaneously sold to another counterparty. Settlement of such 
transactions typically takes place within a few business days of 
the transaction date according to the relevant market rules and 
conventions. The amounts due from and payable to 
counterparties in respect of as yet unsettled Matched Principal 
transactions are shown gross, except where a netting agreement, 
which is legally enforceable at all times, exists and the asset and 
liability are either settled net or simultaneously. 

(n) Cash and cash equivalents 
Cash comprises cash in hand and demand deposits which may 
be accessed without penalty. Cash equivalents comprise short 
term highly liquid investments with a maturity of less than 
three months from the date of acquisition. For the purposes 
of the Consolidated Cash Flow Statement, cash and cash 
equivalents consist of cash and cash equivalents as defined 
above, net of outstanding bank overdrafts. 

(o) Interest bearing loans and borrowings 
All loans and borrowings are initially recognised at fair value, 
being the consideration received net of issue costs associated 
with the borrowing. 

After initial recognition, interest bearing loans and borrowings 
are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest 
rate method. Amortised cost is calculated taking into account 
any issue costs and any discounts or premium on settlement. 
Gains and losses are recognised in the income statement 
when the liabilities are derecognised, as well as through the 
amortisation process. 

(p) Client money 
Client money to settle transaction bargains is held separately 
and included in the Group’s balance sheet. The net return 
received on managing client money is included within 
interest. 

(q) Provisions 
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present 
obligation, legal or constructive, as a result of a past event 
where it is probable that this will result in an outflow of 
economic benefits that can be reasonably estimated. 

Provisions for restructuring costs are recognised when the 
Group has a detailed formal plan for the restructuring, which 
has been notified to affected parties. 

(r) Foreign currencies 
The individual financial statements of each Group company 
are prepared in the currency of the primary economic 
environment in which it operates (its functional currency). 
For the purpose of the Consolidated Financial Statements, 
the results and financial position of each Group company 
are expressed in Pounds sterling, which is the functional 
currency of the Group and the presentation currency for the 
Consolidated Financial Statements. 

In preparing the financial statements of the individual 
companies, transactions in currencies other than the functional 
currency are recorded at the rates of exchange prevailing on 
the dates of the transactions. Gains and losses arising from the 
settlement of these transactions, and from the retranslation of 
monetary assets and liabilities denominated in currencies other 
than the functional currency at rates prevailing at the balance 
sheet date, are recognised in the income statement. Non-
monetary assets and liabilities denominated in currencies other 
than the functional currency that are measured at historical 
cost or fair value, are translated at the exchange rate at the date 
of the transaction or at the date the fair value was determined. 

For the purpose of presenting Consolidated Financial 
Statements, the assets and liabilities of the Group’s foreign 
operations are translated at exchange rates prevailing on the 
balance sheet date. Exchange differences arising are classified 
as other comprehensive income and transferred to the 
Group’s translation reserve. Such translation differences are 
recognised as income or as expense in the year in which the 
operation is disposed of. Income and expense items are 
translated at average exchange rates for the year. 

(s) Taxation 
The tax expense represents the sum of tax currently payable 
and movements in deferred tax. 

The tax currently payable is based on taxable profit for the 
year using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively 
enacted by the balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax 
payable in respect of prior years. 

66  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
66 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
Deferred tax is accounted for using the balance sheet liability 
method in respect of temporary differences arising between 
the carrying amount of assets and liabilities in the Financial 
Statements and the corresponding tax basis used in the 
computation of taxable profit. Deferred tax liabilities are 
generally recognised for all temporary differences and 
deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is 
probable that taxable profits will be available against which 
deductible temporary differences may be utilised. Temporary 
differences are not recognised if they arise from goodwill or 
from initial recognition of other assets and liabilities in a 
transaction which affects neither the tax profit nor the 
accounting profit. 

Deferred tax liabilities are recognised for taxable temporary 
differences arising on investments in subsidiaries and 
associates, except where the Group is able to control the 
reversal of the temporary difference and it is probable  
that the temporary difference will not reverse in the 
foreseeable future. 

Deferred tax is calculated at the rates that are expected  
to apply when the asset or liability is settled or when the asset 
is realised. Deferred tax is charged or credited in the income 
statement, except when it relates to items credited or charged 
directly to other comprehensive income or equity, in which 
case the deferred tax is also dealt with in other 
comprehensive income or equity. 

(t) Leases 
Assets held under finance leases, which transfer to the Group 
substantially all the risks and benefits incidental to ownership 
of the leased item, are capitalised at the inception of the lease 
at the fair value of the leased property or, if lower, at the 
present value of the minimum lease payments. Lease 
payments are apportioned between the finance charges and 
reduction of the lease liability so as to achieve a constant rate 
of interest on the remaining balance of the liability. Finance 
charges are charged directly against income.  

Capitalised leased assets are depreciated over the shorter  
of the estimated useful life of the asset or the lease term. 

Leases where the lessor retains substantially all the risks and 
benefits of ownership of the asset are classified as operating 
leases. Operating lease payments are recognised as an 
expense in the income statement on a straight-line basis 
over the lease term. 

(u) Retirement benefit costs 
Defined contributions made to employees’ personal pension 
plans are charged to the income statement as and when 
incurred.  

For defined benefit retirement plans, the cost of providing the 
benefits is determined using the projected unit credit method. 
Actuarial gains and losses are recognised in full in the year in 
which they occur. They are recognised outside the income 
statement and are presented in other comprehensive income. 

Past service cost is recognised immediately to the extent that 
the benefits have already vested, and is otherwise amortised 
on a straight-line basis over the average period until the 
amended benefits become vested. 

The amount recognised in the balance sheet represents the 
net of the present value of the defined benefit obligation as 
adjusted for actuarial gains and losses and past service cost, 
and the fair value of plan assets. Any asset resulting from this 
calculation is limited to the unrecognised actuarial losses and 
past service cost, plus the present value of available refunds 
and reductions in future contributions to the plan. 

(v) Share-based payments 
The Group issues equity-settled share-based payments to 
certain employees. Equity-settled share-based payments are 
measured at fair value at the date of grant. The fair value 
determined at the grant date of the equity-settled share-
based payments is expensed on a straight-line basis over the 
vesting period, based on the Group’s estimate of shares that 
will eventually vest. 

The fair value of share options issued is determined using 
appropriate valuation models. The expected life used in  
the models has been adjusted, based on management’s  
best estimate for the effects of non-transferability,  
exercise restrictions, and behavioural considerations. 

The estimated fair value of shares granted is based on 
the share price at grant date, reduced where shares do 
not qualify for dividends during the vesting period. Market 
based performance conditions for equity-settled payments are 
reflected in the initial fair value of the award. 

(w) Equity instruments 
Equity instruments issued by the Company are recorded at the 
value of proceeds received, net of direct issue costs. An equity 
instrument is any contract that evidences a residual interest in 
the assets of the Group after deducting all of its liabilities. 

(x) Treasury shares 
Where share capital recognised as equity is repurchased, 
the amount of the consideration paid, including directly 
attributable costs, net of any tax effects, is recognised as a 
deduction from equity. When treasury shares are sold or re-
issued subsequently, the amount received is recognised as an 
increase in equity, and the resulting surplus or deficit on the 
transaction is transferred to or from retained earnings. 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  67
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 67

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
Notes to the Consolidated  
 Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

3. Summary of significant accounting policies 
continued
(y) Accounting estimates and judgements 
In the application of the Group’s accounting policies, the 
Directors are required to make judgements, estimates and 
assumptions about the carrying amounts of assets and 
liabilities that are not readily apparent from other sources. 
The estimates and associated assumptions are based on 
historical experience and other factors that are considered to 
be relevant. Actual results may differ from these estimates. 

Estimates and assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis 
and revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the 
period an estimate is revised. Significant judgement and 
estimates are necessary in relation to the following matters: 

Impairment of goodwill and intangible assets 
Determining whether goodwill and intangible assets are 
impaired requires an estimation of the value in use of the 
cash-generating units to which these assets have been 
allocated. The value in use calculation requires estimation of 
future cash flows expected to arise for the cash-generating 
unit, the selection of suitable discount rates and the 
estimation of future growth rates.  

Taxation 
In arriving at the current and deferred tax liability the Group 
has taken account of tax issues that are subject to ongoing 
discussions with the relevant tax authorities. Liabilities have 
been calculated based on management’s assessment of 
relevant information and advice. Where outcomes differ 
from the amounts initially recorded, such differences impact 
current and deferred tax amounts in the period the outcome 
is determined. 

Provisions 
Provisions are established by the Group based on 
management’s assessment of relevant information and advice 
available at the time of preparing the Financial Statements. 
Outcomes are uncertain and dependent on future events. 
Where outcomes differ from management’s expectations, 
differences from the amount initially provided will impact 
profit or loss in the period the outcome is determined.  

Contingent consideration payable on acquisitions 
Acquisition consideration that is contingent on future 
events is recorded at its acquisition date fair value, based 
on management’s assessment of achieving the required 
targets. Subsequent changes in the fair value of contingent 
consideration are reflected in profit or loss in the period in 
which the remeasurement occurs. 

Retirement benefit asset  
The Group’s retirement benefit asset is the net of its defined 
benefit scheme’s assets and the related defined benefit 
obligation. The defined benefit obligation represents the 
scheme’s future liabilities, which are estimated using actuarial 
and other financial assumptions, discounted to a current value 
using a discount rate set by reference to market yields on high 
quality corporate bonds. The value of the defined benefit 
obligation is sensitive to changes in the actuarial, financial 
and discount rate assumptions, changes to which would be 
reflected in other comprehensive income in the period the 
change occurs. 

68  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
68 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

4. Segmental analysis
Products and services from which reportable segments derive their revenues 
The Group is organised by geographic reporting segments which are used for the purposes of resource allocation and assessment 
of segmental performance by Group management. These are the Group’s reportable segments under IFRS 8 ‘Operating Segments’. 

Each geographic reportable segment derives revenue from Treasury Products, Interest Rate Derivatives, Fixed Income, Equities, 
Energy, and Information Sales and Risk Management Services. 

Information regarding the Group’s operating segments is reported below: 

Analysis by geographical segment 

Revenue 

Europe and the Middle East 

Americas 

Asia Pacific 

Operating profit 

Europe and the Middle East 

Americas 

Asia Pacific 

Underlying operating profit 
Net credit/(charge) relating to major legal actions(1) 
Charge relating to cost improvement programme(2) 
Acquisition costs(2) 
Acquisition related share-based payment charge(2) 
Goodwill impairment(2) 

Reported operating profit 

Finance income 

Finance costs 

Profit before tax 

Taxation 

Profit of consolidated companies 

Share of results of associates 

Profit for the year 

2014 
£m 

405.6 

201.6 

96.3 

703.5 

80.1 

10.5 

10.1 

100.7 

3.1 

(46.7)

(1.8)

(0.9)

(6.8)

47.6 

3.6 

(17.7)

33.5 

(10.4)

23.1 

1.9 

25.0 

2013 
£m

468.7

233.9

101.1

803.7

97.9

10.4

7.1

115.4

(15.2)

–

–

–

–

100.2

3.7

(19.5)

84.4

(20.0)

64.4

1.4

65.8

Notes: 
(1) The credit relating to major legal actions in 2014 is the net of amounts included in other income and in administrative expenses. 
(2) Costs are included in administrative expenses. 

There are no inter-segment sales included in segment revenue.  

Tullett Prebon plc is domiciled in the UK. Revenue attributable to the UK amounted to £345.0m (2013: £402.6m) and the total 
revenue from other countries was £358.5m (2013: £401.1m). 

69 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  69

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

4. Segmental analysis 
Other segmental information 

continued

Capital additions 

Europe and the Middle East – UK 

Europe and the Middle East – Other 

Americas 

Asia Pacific 

Depreciation and amortisation 

Europe and the Middle East – UK 

Europe and the Middle East – Other 

Americas 

Asia Pacific 

Goodwill impairment 

Brazil (Note 13) 

Share-based compensation 

Europe and the Middle East – UK 

Europe and the Middle East – Other 

Americas 

Asia Pacific 

Segment assets 

Europe and the Middle East – UK 

Europe and the Middle East – Other 

Americas 

Asia Pacific 

70  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
70 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

2014 
£m 

5.9 

0.6 

3.7 

0.8 

11.0 

2014 
£m 

8.3 

0.6 

3.8 

0.9 

13.6 

2014 
£m 

6.8 

6.8 

2014 
£m 

1.3 

– 

(0.1)

– 

1.2 

2014 
£m 

1,741.7 

24.2 

2,184.4 

70.1 

4,020.4 

2013
£m

13.2

0.7

2.7

0.5

17.1

2013
£m

5.8

0.7

4.0

1.4

11.9

2013
£m

–

–

2013
£m

1.0

–

–

–

1.0

2013
£m

1,728.4

29.2

4,676.7

58.0

6,492.3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Segment liabilities 

Europe and the Middle East – UK 

Europe and the Middle East – Other 

Americas 

Asia Pacific 

Segment assets and liabilities exclude all inter-segment balances. 

Analysis by product group 

Revenue  

Treasury Products 

Interest Rate Derivatives 

Fixed Income 

Equities 

Energy 

Information Sales and Risk Management Services 

2014 
£m 

2013 
£m

1,408.8 

19.8 

2,089.8 

38.5 

3,556.9 

1,465.0

23.2

4,575.3

30.4

6,093.9

2014 
£m 

190.5 

140.6 

186.5 

39.5 

100.0 

46.4 

703.5 

2013 
£m

211.4

174.2

225.5

43.2

102.4

47.0

803.7

5. Other operating income 
Other operating income represents receipts such as rental income, royalties, insurance proceeds, settlements from competitors 
and business relocation grants. Costs associated with such items are included in administrative expenses. 

6. Profit for the year 
The profit for the year has been arrived at after charging: 

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (Note 15) 

Amortisation of intangible assets (Note 14) 

Staff costs (Note 7) 

Auditor’s remuneration for audit services (see below) 

Exceptional and acquisition related items: 

– Net credit/(charge) relating to major legal actions 

– Charge relating to cost improvement programme 

– Acquisition costs 

– Acquisition related share-based payment charge 

– Goodwill impairment 

– Taxation credit on exceptional and acquisition related items

2014 
£m 

6.5 

7.1 

491.6 

2.2 

3.1 

(46.7)

(1.8)

(0.9)

(6.8)

6.5 

2013 
£m

5.5

6.4

532.1

1.9

(15.2)

–

–

–

–

2.4

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  71
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 71

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

6. Profit for the year
The analysis of auditor’s remuneration is as follows: 

 continued

Audit of the Group’s annual accounts 
Audit of the Company’s subsidiaries and associates pursuant to legislation(1)

Total audit fees 

Audit-related assurance services 

Taxation compliance services 

Other taxation advisory services 

Other assurance services 

Corporate finance services 

Other services 

Total non-audit fees 

2014 
£000 

433 

1,735 

2,168 

289 

115 

11 

– 

283 

95 

793 

2013 
£000

393

1,515

1,908

80

128

4

13

300

244

769

Audit fees payable to the Company’s auditor and its associates in respect of associated 
pension schemes 

13 

13

Note: 
(1) Includes £252,000 relating to the pre-acquisition audits of PVM Oil Associates Limited and its subsidiaries. 

7. Staff costs
The average monthly number of full time equivalent employees and Directors of the Group was: 

Europe and the Middle East 

Americas 

Asia Pacific 

The aggregate employment costs of staff and Directors were: 

Wages, salaries, bonuses and incentive payments 

Social security costs 

Defined contribution pension costs (Note 34(b)) 

Share-based compensation expense 

8. Finance income

Interest receivable and similar income

Deemed interest arising on the defined benefit pension scheme surplus

72  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
72 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

2014 
No. 

1,179 

796 

561 

2,536 

2014 
£m 

447.3 

36.2 

6.9 

1.2 

2013 
No.

1,216

814

573

2,603

2013 
£m

483.0

41.1

7.0

1.0

491.6 

532.1

2014 
£m 

1.4 

2.2 

3.6 

2013 
£m

1.8

1.9

3.7

 
 
 
 
9. Finance costs 

Interest and fees payable on bank facilities  

Interest payable on Sterling Notes August 2014 

Interest payable on Sterling Notes July 2016 

Interest payable on Sterling Notes June 2019 

Other interest payable 

Amortisation of debt issue and bank facility costs 

Total borrowing costs 

Amortisation of discount on deferred consideration 

10. Taxation 

Current tax 

UK corporation tax 

Overseas tax 

Prior year UK corporation tax  

Prior year overseas tax 

Deferred tax (Note 19) 

Current year 

Prior year  

2014 
£m 

1.5 

0.4 

9.9 

4.2 

0.5 

1.1 

17.6 

0.1 

17.7 

2013 
£m

1.7

0.6

9.9

4.2

0.3

2.3

19.0

0.5

19.5

2014 
£m 

2013
£m

8.9 

4.4 

(0.9)

(3.5)

8.9 

0.8 

0.7 

1.5 

16.8

4.4

(0.8)

(1.2)

19.2

1.3

(0.5)

0.8

Tax charge for the year 

10.4 

20.0

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  73
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 73

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

10. Taxation
The charge for the year can be reconciled to the profit in the income statement as follows: 

 continued

Profit before tax 

Tax based on the UK corporation tax rate of 21.5% (2013: 23.25%) 

Tax effect of non-deductible goodwill impairment 

Tax effect of expenses that are not deductible 

Tax effect of non-taxable income 

Unrecognised timing differences 

Prior year adjustments 

Other 

Tax charge for the year 

2014 
£m 

33.5 

7.2 

1.5 

4.4 

(0.2)

1.8 

(3.7)

(0.6)

10.4 

2013
£m

84.4

19.6

–

4.9

(0.6)

(0.9)

(2.5)

(0.5)

20.0

In addition to the income statement charge, the following current and deferred tax items have been included in other 
comprehensive income and equity: 

2014 

Current tax charge relating to: 

– Exchange movement on net investment loans 

Deferred tax charge relating to: 

– Increase in the defined benefit pension scheme surplus 

Tax charge on items taken directly to other comprehensive income and equity

2013  

Current tax credit relating to: 

– Exchange movement on net investment loans 

Deferred tax charge relating to: 

– Increase in the defined benefit pension scheme surplus 

Tax charge on items taken directly to other comprehensive income and equity

Recognised in 
other 
comprehensive 
income 
£m 

Recognised in 
equity 
£m 

Total 
£m

0.2 

3.5 

3.7 

(0.2) 

2.5 

2.3 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

0.2

3.5

3.7

(0.2)

2.5

2.3

74  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
74 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
11. Earnings per share

Basic – underlying 

Diluted – underlying 

Basic earnings per share 

Diluted earnings per share 

The calculation of basic and diluted earnings per share is based on the following number of shares: 

Basic weighted average shares 

Contingently issuable shares 

Issuable on exercise of options 

Diluted weighted average shares 

The earnings used in the calculation of underlying, basic and diluted earnings per share, are set out below: 

Earnings for the year  

Minority interests 

Earnings 

Net (credit)/charge relating to major legal actions 

Charge relating to cost improvement programme 

Acquisition costs 

Acquisition related share-based payment charge 

Goodwill impairment 

Tax on above items 

Underlying earnings  

12. Dividends

Amounts recognised as distributions to equity holders in the year:

Interim dividend for the year ended 31 December 2014 of 5.6p per share

Final dividend for the year ended 31 December 2013 of 11.25p per share

Interim dividend for the year ended 31 December 2013 of 5.6p per share

Final dividend for the year ended 31 December 2012 of 11.25p per share

2014 

32.3p 

32.3p 

11.2p 

11.2p 

2014 
No.(m) 

220.4 

0.2 

– 

2013

36.0p

36.0p

30.1p

30.1p

2013 
No.(m)

217.8

–

0.2

220.6 

218.0

2014 
£m 

25.0 

(0.4)

24.6 

(3.1)

46.7 

1.8 

0.9 

6.8 

(6.5)

71.2 

2014 
£m 

12.2 

24.5 

– 

– 

36.7 

2013
£m

65.8

(0.2)

65.6

15.2

–

–

–

–

(2.4)

78.4

2013
£m

–

–

12.2

24.5

36.7

In respect of the current year, the Directors propose that the final dividend of 11.25p per share amounting to £27.4m will be paid 
on 14 May 2015 to all shareholders on the Register of Members on 24 April 2015. This dividend is subject to approval by 
shareholders at the AGM and has not been included as a liability in these Financial Statements.  

The trustees of the Tullett Prebon plc Employee Benefit Trust 2007 have waived their rights to dividends. 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  75
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 75

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

13. Intangible assets arising on consolidation 

At 1 January 2014 

Recognised on acquisitions 

Impairment 

Effect of movements in exchange rates

At 31 December 2014 

At 1 January 2013 

Effect of movements in exchange rates

At 31 December 2013 

Goodwill 
£m 

Other 
£m 

275.6 

55.8 

(6.8) 

2.5 

327.1 

278.5 

(2.9) 

275.6 

– 

9.5 

– 

– 

9.5 

– 

– 

– 

Total
£m

275.6

65.3

(6.8)

2.5

336.6

278.5

(2.9)

275.6

Goodwill arising through business combinations has been allocated to individual cash-generating units (‘CGUs’) for impairment 
testing as follows: 

CGU 

Europe and the Middle East 

North America 

Brazil 

Asia Pacific 

PVM Oil Associates 

2014 
£m 

2013
£m

195.1 

195.1

57.5 

3.3 

19.3 

51.9 

50.4

10.8

19.3

–

327.1 

275.6

Determining whether goodwill is impaired requires an estimation of the recoverable amount of each CGU. The recoverable amount 
of each CGU is the higher of its value in use (‘VIU’) or its net realisable value (‘NRV’). 

The key assumptions for the VIU calculations are those regarding expected cash flows arising in future periods, regional growth 
rates and the discount rates. Future cash flow projections are based on the most recent Board approved financial budgets which 
are used to project cash flows for the next five years. After this period a steady state cash flow is used to derive a terminal value 
for the CGU. Goodwill has an indefinite life and this is reflected in the calculation of the CGU’s terminal value. Estimated average 
growth rates, based on each region’s constituent country growth rates as published by the World Bank, are used to estimate cash 
flows after the budgeted period. 

As at 31 December 2014 VIU has been used to estimate recoverable amounts for all CGUs and for all CGU’s except Brazil, 
the estimate of the recoverable amount was higher than the carrying value. The calculations have been subject to stress tests 
demonstrating that the impairment test results are tolerant to reasonably possible changes in assumptions as to discount rate 
and future cash flows. The VIU calculations used growth rates of 2% for Europe and the Middle East, 2.5% for North America, and 
3% for Asia. Resultant cash flows for Europe and the Middle East, and Asia have been discounted at a pre-tax discount rate of 
10.5% (2013: 11.5%), and for North America have been discounted at 12.5% (2013: 13.5%) reflecting the higher level of uncertainty 
in the forecasts of that CGU’s future cash flows. 

The estimated recoverable amount for the Brazil CGU using VIU was calculated to be lower than that CGU’s carrying value. 
Market conditions in Brazil have been challenging in the last two years and revenue has fallen by nearly one quarter since 2012. 
The business continues to be profitable but the absolute level of operating profit has fallen below the level required to support the 
CGU’s carrying value. The recoverable amount based on its NRV was calculated to be higher than its VIU although still lower than 
its carrying value, and £6.8m has been recognised as an impairment of the goodwill attributed to that CGU. 

76  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
76 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
14. Other intangible assets 

Cost 

At 1 January 2014 

Additions 

Amounts derecognised 

Effect of movements in exchange rates

At 31 December 2014 

Accumulated amortisation 

At 1 January 2014 

Charge for the year 

Amounts derecognised 

Effect of movements in exchange rates

At 31 December 2014 

Carrying amount 

At 31 December 2014 

Cost 

At 1 January 2013 

Additions 

Amounts derecognised 

Effect of movements in exchange rates

At 31 December 2013 

Accumulated amortisation 

At 1 January 2013 

Charge for the year 

Amounts derecognised 

Effect of movements in exchange rates

At 31 December 2013 

Carrying amount 

At 31 December 2013 

Purchased  
software 
£m 

Developed 
software 
£m 

11.6 

0.7 

(5.2) 

0.3 

7.4 

(9.6) 

(1.0) 

5.2 

(0.1) 

(5.5) 

36.4 

4.6 

– 

0.8 

41.8 

(16.6)

(6.1)

– 

(0.9)

(23.6)

Total
£m

48.0

5.3

(5.2)

1.1

49.2

(26.2)

(7.1)

5.2

(1.0)

(29.1)

1.9 

18.2 

20.1

10.7 

1.3 

(0.1) 

(0.3) 

11.6 

(8.8) 

(1.1) 

– 

0.3 

(9.6) 

31.6 

5.4 

(0.3)

(0.3)

36.4 

(11.9)

(5.3)

0.3 

0.3 

(16.6)

42.3

6.7

(0.4)

(0.6)

48.0

(20.7)

(6.4)

0.3

0.6

(26.2)

2.0 

19.8 

21.8

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  77
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 77

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

15. Property, plant and equipment 

Cost 

At 1 January 2014 

Additions 

Acquired with acquisitions 

Disposals 

Effect of movements in exchange rates

At 31 December 2014 

Accumulated depreciation 

At 1 January 2014 

Charge for the year 

Disposals 

Effect of movements in exchange rates

At 31 December 2014 

Carrying amount 

At 31 December 2014 

Cost 

At 1 January 2013 

Additions 

Disposals 

Effect of movements in exchange rates

At 31 December 2013 

Accumulated depreciation 

At 1 January 2013 

Charge for the year 

Disposals 

Effect of movements in exchange rates

At 31 December 2013 

Carrying amount 

At 31 December 2013 

No assets are held under finance leases. 

78  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
78 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

Land, 
buildings 
 and 
leasehold 
improvements 
£m 

Furniture, 
fixtures, 
equipment 
and 
motor 
vehicles 
£m 

29.5 

1.3 

– 

(5.9) 

0.5 

25.4 

(17.3) 

(1.5) 

5.9 

(0.3) 

(13.2) 

51.6 

4.4 

1.0 

(3.9)

0.8 

53.9 

(35.0)

(5.0)

3.9 

(0.6)

(36.7)

Total
£m

81.1

5.7

1.0

(9.8)

1.3

79.3

(52.3)

(6.5)

9.8

(0.9)

(49.9)

12.2 

17.2 

29.4

29.7 

0.1 

– 

(0.3) 

29.5 

(16.1) 

(1.6) 

– 

0.4 

(17.3) 

47.0 

10.3 

(4.0)

(1.7)

51.6 

(34.9)

(3.9)

2.5 

1.3 

(35.0)

76.7

10.4

(4.0)

(2.0)

81.1

(51.0)

(5.5)

2.5

1.7

(52.3)

12.2 

16.6 

28.8

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
16. Interest in associates  

Carrying amount of investment in associates 

Aggregated amounts relating to associates: 

Total assets 

Total liabilities 

Net assets 

Revenue 

Profit for the year 

Other comprehensive income attributable to the owners 

Group’s share of profit for the year 

Group’s share of other comprehensive income 

Dividends received from associates during the year 

2014 
£m 

5.0 

22.3 

(8.1)

14.2 

2013
£m

4.0

16.4

(5.3)

11.1

22.0 

16.7

5.4 

– 

1.9 

– 

1.0 

3.8

–

1.4

–

1.0

Interests in associates are measured using the equity method. A list of investments in associates, including the name, country of 
incorporation and proportion of ownership interest, is given in Note 37. 

17. Investments 

Available-for-sale assets carried at fair value 

– unlisted 

– listed 

2014 
£m 

4.2 

1.0 

5.2 

2013
£m

4.6

1.1

5.7

The fair values of unlisted available-for-sale assets are based on derived valuations as disclosed in Note 25(g). 

Listed investments comprise equity securities that present the Group with opportunity for return through dividend income 
and capital gains. They have no fixed maturity or coupon rate. Fair values are derived from quoted market prices (Level 1 valuation). 

18. Financial assets 

Short term government securities 

Term deposits 

Financial assets are liquid funds held on deposit with banks and clearing organisations. 

2014 
£m 

8.3 

2.4 

10.7 

2013
£m

9.1

22.1

31.2

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  79
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 79

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

19. Deferred tax

Deferred tax assets 

Deferred tax liabilities 

The movement for the year in the Group’s net deferred tax position was as follows: 

At 1 January 

Charge to income for the year 

Charge to other comprehensive income for the year 

Recognised with acquisitions 

Effect of movements in exchange rates

At 31 December 

Deferred tax balances and movements thereon are analysed as:  

2014 
£m 

2.3 

(24.1)

(21.8)

2014 
£m 

(15.0)

(1.5)

(3.5)

(1.7)

(0.1)

(21.8)

2013
£m

2.9

(17.9)

(15.0)

2013
£m

(11.4)

(0.8)

(2.5)

–

(0.3)

(15.0)

2014 

Share-based payment awards 

Defined benefit pension scheme 

Tax losses 

Other timing differences 

2013  

Share-based payment awards 

Defined benefit pension scheme 

Tax losses 

Other timing differences 

Recognised
in profit 
or loss
£m

Recognised 
in other 
comprehensive
 income
£m

Recognised 
with 
acquisitions 
£m 

Effect of 
movements  
in exchange 
rates 
£m 

At 
31 December
£m

At 
1 January 
£m

0.3

(17.7)

–

2.4

(15.0)

0.3

(14.5)

0.2

2.6

(11.4)

(0.1)

(0.5)

–

(0.9)

(1.5)

–

(0.7)

(0.2)

0.1

(0.8)

–

(3.5)

–

–

(3.5)

–

(2.5)

–

–

(2.5)

– 

– 

0.4 

(2.1) 

(1.7) 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(0.1)

(0.1)

– 

– 

– 

(0.3)

(0.3)

0.2

(21.7)

0.4

(0.7)

(21.8)

0.3

(17.7)

–

2.4

(15.0)

At the balance sheet date, the Group has a net unrecognised deferred tax asset of £21.3m (2013: £16.9m) including unrecognised 
deferred tax in respect of tax losses of £14.3m (2013: £16.3m) which is available for offset against future profits.  

A deferred tax asset of £0.4m in respect of tax losses has been recognised in 2014 (2013: £nil) as it is considered probable that 
there will be future taxable profits available. 

No deferred tax has been recognised on temporary differences associated with unremitted earnings of subsidiaries, other than 
£0.1m recognised by PVM, as the Group is able to control the timing of distributions and overseas dividends are largely exempt 
from UK tax. As at the balance sheet date, the Group had unrecognised deferred tax liabilities of £0.9m (2013: £0.7m) in respect of 
withholding tax on unremitted earnings. 

80  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
80 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
20. Trade and other receivables 

Trade receivables 

Settlement balances 

Financial assets 

Other debtors 

Prepayments and accrued income 

Corporation tax 

Owed by associates and related parties

2014 
£m 

87.8 

3,134.1 

3,221.9 

10.3 

27.9 

1.3 

0.5 

2013
£m

70.2

5,682.5

5,752.7

10.8

55.1

1.2

0.4

3,261.9 

5,820.2

The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade and other receivables approximates to their fair value. 

The table below shows the ageing of trade receivables: 

Less than 30 days (not yet due) 

Between 30 and 60 days 

Between 60 and 90 days 

Greater than 90 days 

Total past due 

Trade receivables 

2014 
£m 

59.4 

13.9 

6.9 

7.6 

28.4 

87.8 

2013
£m

50.5

10.7

4.0

5.0

19.7

70.2

Trade receivables are shown net of a provision of £1.8m (2013: £1.0m) against certain trade receivables due after 90 days. 

The table below shows the ageing of settlement balances: 

Amounts not yet due 

Less than 30 days 

Between 30 and 60 days 

Between 60 and 90 days 

Greater than 90 days 

Total past due 

Settlement balances 

2014 
£m 

2013
£m

3,082.5 

5,544.1

45.2 

4.6 

1.6 

0.2 

51.6 

130.5

5.4

2.4

0.1

138.4

3,134.1 

5,682.5

Settlement balances arise on Matched Principal brokerage whereby securities are bought from one counterparty and 
simultaneously sold to another counterparty. The above analysis reflects only the receivable side of such transactions. 
Corresponding payable amounts are shown in Note 21 ‘Trade and other payables’. 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  81
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 81

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

21. Trade and other payables 

Settlement balances 

Trade payables 

Financial liabilities 

Tax and social security 

Other creditors 

Accruals and deferred income 

2014 
£m 

2013
£m

3,132.3 

5,681.8

5.4 

7.6

3,137.7 

5,689.4

18.2 

3.1 

110.2 

3,269.2 

18.2

2.7

102.4

5,812.7

The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade and other payables approximates to their fair value. 

22. Interest bearing loans and borrowings  

2014 

Sterling Notes July 2016 

Sterling Notes June 2019 

2013 

Sterling Notes August 2014 

Sterling Notes July 2016 

Sterling Notes June 2019 

Less than 
one year 
£m  

Greater than 
one year 
£m 

– 

– 

– 

8.5 

– 

– 

8.5 

140.6 

79.1 

219.7 

– 

140.2 

78.9 

219.1 

Total
£m

140.6

79.1

219.7

8.5

140.2

78.9

227.6

All amounts are denominated in Sterling and are stated after unamortised transaction costs. An analysis of borrowings by maturity 
has been disclosed in Note 25(d). 

Sterling Notes: Due July 2016 
In July 2009 £141,144,000 of 7.04% Guaranteed Notes due July 2016 were issued. 

At 31 December 2014 their fair value was £149.0m (2013: £149.8m). 

Sterling Notes: Due June 2019 
In December 2012, the Group issued its first series of Sterling Notes, amounting to £80,000,000, under its Euro Medium Term Note 
Programme. The notes have a coupon of 5.25% and are due in June 2019. 

At 31 December 2014 their fair value was £82.4m (2013: £82.3m). 

Sterling Notes: Repaid August 2014 
£8,470,000, 8.25% Step-up Coupon Subordinated Notes were repaid in August 2014. At 31 December 2013 their fair value 
was £8.5m. 

82  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
82 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Bank credit facility 
During 2013 the Group repaid all of its amortising term loan. The interest rate on the bank loan was 3.6% and debt issue costs of 
£1.3m relating to the bank loan were amortised. 

The Group has a £150m committed revolving credit facility which matures in April 2016. This facility was not drawn during the 
year. Facility fees of £1.5m are payable annually. 

23. Provisions 

2014 

At 1 January 2014 

Charge to income statement 

Utilisation of provision 

Recognised on acquisitions 

Effect of movements in exchange rates

At 31 December 2014 

2013 

At 1 January 2013 

Released to income statement 

Utilisation of provision 

Effect of movements in exchange rates

At 31 December 2013 

Included in current liabilities 

Included in non-current liabilities 

Property
£m

Restructuring 
£m 

Legal and 
other 
£m 

2.4

3.8

(0.4)

–

0.1

5.9

3.8

(0.4)

(1.0)

–

2.4

1.7 

21.4 

(14.6) 

– 

0.4 

8.9 

4.9 

– 

(3.2) 

– 

1.7 

2.0 

0.1 

(1.0)

0.3 

0.1 

1.5 

2.6 

(0.3)

(0.2)

(0.1)

2.0 

2014 
£m 

6.6 

9.7 

16.3 

Total
£m

6.1

25.3

(16.0)

0.3

0.6

16.3

11.3

(0.7)

(4.4)

(0.1)

6.1

2013
£m

1.8

4.3

6.1

Property provisions outstanding as at 31 December 2014 relate to provisions in respect of onerous leases and building 
dilapidations. The onerous lease provision represents the net present value of the future rental cost net of expected sub-lease 
income. These leases expire in one to twelve years (2013: one to thirteen years). The building dilapidations provision represents the 
estimated cost of making good dilapidations and disrepair on various leasehold buildings. The leases expire in one to five years. 

Restructuring provisions outstanding as at 31 December 2014 relate to termination and other employee related costs, the majority 
of which are expected to be discharged during 2015. 

Legal and other provisions include provisions for legal claims brought against subsidiaries of the Group together with provisions 
against obligations for certain employee related costs and non-property related onerous contracts. At present the timing of any 
payments is uncertain and provisions are subject to regular review. It is expected that the obligations will be discharged over  
the next three years. 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  83
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 83

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

24. Other long term payables 

Accruals and deferred income 

Deferred consideration (Note 29) 

2014 
£m 

9.0 

6.3 

15.3 

2013
£m

10.0

0.3

10.3

Accruals and deferred income includes deferred leasehold rental accruals that build up during rent free periods which are 
subsequently utilised over the rental payment period of the lease. 

25. Financial instruments 
The following analysis should be read in conjunction with the information on risk management, capital employed and regulatory 
capital included in the Strategic Report on pages 15 to 21. 

(a) Capital management 
The Group’s policy is to maintain a capital base and funding structure that maintains creditor, regulator and market confidence 
and provides flexibility for business development whilst also optimising returns to shareholders. The capital structure of the Group 
consists of debt, as set out in Note 22, cash and cash equivalents, other current financial assets and equity attributable to equity 
holders of the parent, comprising issued capital, reserves and retained earnings as disclosed in Notes 26 and 27. 

The Group has an investment firm consolidation waiver under which it is required to monitor its compliance with a financial 
holding company test which takes into account the Company’s shareholders’ funds and the aggregated credit risk, market risk and 
fixed overhead requirements of the Company’s subsidiaries. A number of the Company’s subsidiaries are individually regulated 
and are required to maintain capital that is appropriate to the risks entailed in their businesses according to definitions that vary 
according to each jurisdiction. 

(b) Categorisation of financial assets and liabilities 

Financial assets 

Available-for- 
sale assets 
£m  

Loans and 
receivables 
£m 

5.2 

8.3 

– 

– 

– 

13.5 

5.7 

9.1 

– 

– 

– 

14.8 

– 

2.4 

287.1 

87.8 

3,134.1 

3,511.4 

– 

22.1 

251.6 

70.2 

5,682.5 

6,026.4 

Total
£m

5.2

10.7

287.1

87.8

3,134.1

3,524.9

5.7

31.2

251.6

70.2

5,682.5

6,041.2

2014 

Investments 

Financial assets 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Trade receivables  

Settlement balances 

2013 

Investments 

Financial assets 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Trade receivables  

Settlement balances 

84  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
84 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial liabilities 
Financial liabilities are all held at amortised cost. 

Sterling Notes August 2014 

Sterling Notes July 2016 

Sterling Notes June 2019 

Trade payables 

Settlement balances 

2014 
£m 

– 

140.6 

79.1 

5.4 

3,132.3 

3,357.4 

2013
£m

8.5

140.2

78.9

7.6

5,681.8

5,917.0

(c) Credit risk analysis 
The following table presents an analysis by rating agency designation of cash and cash equivalents, financial assets, trade 
receivables and settlement balances based on Standard & Poor’s ratings or their equivalent. 

AAA to AA+ 

AA to A  
- 

BBB+ to BBB-  

BB+ to B-  

Unrated 

Total 

Provision for doubtful debts 

Cash and cash 
equivalents and 
financial assets

2014
£m

6.3

281.1

9.8

–

0.6

297.8

–

297.8

2013
£m

4.8

270.1

7.5

–

0.4

282.8

–

282.8

Trade receivables

Settlement balances

2014
£m

0.2

57.8

12.1

1.8

17.7

89.6

(1.8)

87.8

2013 
£m 

0.2 

50.6 

7.5 

0.5 

12.4 

71.2 

(1.0) 

70.2 

2014 
£m 

33.7 

2013
£m

1.2

2,174.3 

4,477.0

671.5 

24.5 

230.1 

709.2

417.9

77.2

3,134.1 

5,682.5

– 

–

3,134.1 

5,682.5

In addition to the above, £1.5m (2013: £1.7m) of investments are rated AA to AA+, £1.0m are rated BBB- to BBB+ (2013: £1.1m) and 
£2.7m (2013: £2.9m) are unrated. 

The carrying value of financial assets recorded in the Financial Statements, which is net of impairment losses, represents 
the Group’s maximum exposure to credit risk. None of the Group’s financial assets are secured by collateral or other 
credit enhancements. 

In respect of trade receivables, the Group is not exposed to significant credit risk to a single counterparty or any group 
of counterparties. 

Matched Principal brokerage transactions, whereby securities are bought from one counterparty and sold to another counterparty, 
are settled on a delivery versus payment basis. The above analysis reflects only the receivable side of such transactions, the other 
side being shown in trade and other payables. Settlement of such transactions typically takes place within a few business days 
according to the relevant market rules and conventions and the credit risk is considered to be minimal. 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  85
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 85

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

25. Financial instruments
(d) Maturity profile of financial liabilities 
The table below reflects the contractual maturities, including future interest obligations, of the Group’s financial liabilities as at 
31 December: 

 continued

2014 

Settlement balances 

Trade payables 

Sterling Notes July 2016 

Sterling Notes June 2019 

2013 

Settlement balances 

Trade payables 

Sterling Notes August 2014 

Sterling Notes July 2016 

Sterling Notes June 2019 

Due 
within 
3 months
£m

Due between 
3 months and
12 months
£m

Due between  
1 year and  
5 years 
£m 

Due after 
5 years 
£m 

3,132.3

5.4

–

–

3,137.7

5,678.3

7.6

–

–

–

–

–

9.9

4.2

14.1

3.5

–

9.0

9.9

4.2

5,685.9

26.6

– 

– 

151.1 

96.8 

247.9 

– 

– 

– 

161.0 

16.8 

177.8 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

84.2 

84.2 

Total
£m

3,132.3

5.4

161.0

101.0

3,399.7

5,681.8

7.6

9.0

170.9

105.2

5,974.5

(e) Foreign currency sensitivity analysis 
The table below illustrates the sensitivity of the profit for the year with regard to currency movements on financial assets and 
liabilities denominated in foreign currencies as at the year end.  

Based on a 5% weakening in the US dollar and Euro exchange rates against Sterling, the effect on profit for the year would be 
as follows: 

Change in profit for the year 

2014

USD
£m

(0.8)

EUR 
£m 

(0.6) 

2013

USD 
£m 

(1.3)

EUR
£m

(0.9)

The Group would experience an equal and opposite foreign exchange gain should the US dollar and Euro exchange rates 
strengthen against Sterling. 

86  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
86 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(f) Interest rate sensitivity analysis 
Interest on floating rate financial instruments is reset at intervals of less than one year. The Group’s exposure to interest rates 
arises on cash and cash equivalents and money market instruments. The Sterling Notes are fixed rate financial instruments. 

A 100 basis point change in interest rates, applied to average floating rate financial instrument assets and liabilities during  
the year, would result in the following impact on profit or loss: 

Income/(expense) arising on: 

– floating rate assets 

– floating rate liabilities 

Net income/(expense) for the year 

2014

2013

+100pts
£m

-100pts 
£m 

+100pts 
£m 

-100pts
£m

2.7

–

2.7

(1.3) 

– 

(1.3) 

2.8 

(0.1)

2.7 

(1.5)

0.1

(1.4)

(g) Fair value measurements recognised in the statement of financial position 
The following table provides an analysis of financial instruments that are measured subsequent to initial recognition at fair value, 
grouped into Levels 1 to 3 based on the degree to which the fair value is observable: 

•  Level 1 fair value measurements are those derived from quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets 

or liabilities; 

•  Level 2 fair value measurements are those derived from inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are 

observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices); and  

•  Level 3 fair value measurements are those derived from valuation techniques that include inputs for the asset or liability that  

are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs). 

2014 

Investments  

– unlisted 

– listed 

Financial assets 

– short term government securities 

2013 

Investments  

– unlisted 

– listed 

Financial assets 

– short term government securities 

There were no transfers between Level 1 and 2 during the year. 

Level 1
£m

Level 2 
£m 

Level 3 
£m 

Total
£m

–

1.0

8.3

9.3

–

1.1

9.1

10.2

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

4.2 

– 

– 

4.2 

4.6 

– 

– 

4.6 

4.2

1.0

8.3

13.5

4.6

1.1

9.1

14.8

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  87
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 87

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

25. Financial instruments
(g) Fair value measurements recognised in the statement of financial position continued 
Reconciliation of Level 3 fair value measurements of financial assets: 

 continued

Balance as at 1 January 

Unrealised (loss)/gain in other comprehensive income 

Balance as at 31 December 

2014 
£m 

4.6 

(0.4)

4.2 

2013
£m

4.5

0.1

4.6

There were no financial liabilities subsequently remeasured at fair value on a Level 3 fair value measurement basis. 

The revaluation loss of £0.4m relating to the revaluation of unlisted available-for-sale investments held at the balance sheet date 
is included within the ‘Revaluation reserve’. 

26. Share capital 

Allotted, issued and fully paid 

Ordinary shares of 25p 

Allotted, issued and fully paid 

Ordinary shares of 25p 

2014 
No. 

2013
No.

243,516,227 

217,739,704

2014 
£m 

2013
£m

60.9 

54.4

25,776,523 ordinary shares were issued on 26 November 2014 with a fair value of £64.9m in connection with the acquisition of 
PVM Oil Associates Limited (Note 29). 

27. Reconciliation of shareholders’ funds 
(a) Share capital, Share premium account, Merger reserve 

2014 

As at 1 January 2014 

Issue of ordinary shares 

Share issue costs 

As at 31 December 2014 

2013 

Share 
capital
£m

54.4

6.5

–

60.9

Share 
premium 
account 
£m 

17.1 

– 

– 

17.1 

Merger 
reserve 
£m 

121.5 

58.4 

(1.4)

178.5 

Total
£m

193.0

64.9

(1.4)

256.5

As at 1 January and 31 December 2013

54.4

17.1 

121.5 

193.0

Merger reserve 
On 26 November 2014 the Group issued 25,776,523 ordinary shares with a fair value of £64.9m to acquire the issued share 
capital of PVM Oil Associates Limited. The £58.4m difference between the nominal value of the shares issued and their fair value 
has been credited to the merger reserve. The costs associated with this share issue have been charged against the reserve. As at 
31 December 2013 the merger reserve related to prior share-based acquisitions and represented the difference between the 
value of those acquisitions and the amount required to be recorded in share capital. 

88  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
88 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(b) Other reserves 

2014 

As at 1 January 2014 

Revaluation of investments 

Exchange differences on translation 
of foreign operations 

Taxation charge on components of other 
comprehensive income  

Total comprehensive income 

As at 31 December 2014 

2013 

As at 1 January 2013 

Revaluation of investments 

Exchange differences on translation 
of foreign operations 

Taxation credit on components of other 
comprehensive income  

Total comprehensive income 

As at 31 December 2013 

Reverse 
acquisition 
reserve
£m

(1,182.3)

–

–

–

–

(1,182.3)

(1,182.3)

–

–

–

–

(1,182.3)

Revaluation 
reserve
£m 

Hedging and 
translation
£m

Own  
shares 
£m 

Other 
reserves
£m

1.9

(0.5)

–

–

(0.5)

1.4

2.4

(0.5)

–

–

(0.5)

1.9

0.4

–

7.4

(0.2) 

7.2

7.6

7.7

–

(7.5) 

0.2

(7.3) 

0.4

(0.1) 

(1,180.1)

– 

– 

– 

– 

(0.5)

7.4

(0.2)

6.7

(0.1) 

(1,173.4)

(0.1) 

(1,172.3)

–

–

–

–

(0.5)

(7.5)

0.2

(7.8)

(0.1) 

(1,180.1)

Reverse acquisition reserve 
The acquisition of Collins Stewart Tullett plc by Tullett Prebon plc in 2006 was accounted for as a reverse acquisition. Under IFRS 
the consolidated accounts of Tullett Prebon plc are prepared as if they were a continuation of the consolidated accounts of Collins 
Stewart Tullett plc. The reverse acquisition reserve represents the difference between the initial equity share capital of Tullett 
Prebon plc and the share capital and share premium of Collins Stewart Tullett plc at the time of the acquisition. This resulted in the 
consolidated net assets before and after the acquisition remaining unchanged.  

Revaluation reserve 
The revaluation reserve represents the remeasurement of assets in accordance with IFRS that have been recorded in other 
comprehensive income. 

Hedging and translation 
The hedging and translation reserve records revaluation gains and losses arising on net investment hedges and the effect  
of changes in exchange rates on translation of foreign operations recorded in other comprehensive income. 

Own shares 
As at 31 December 2014, the Tullett Prebon plc Employee Benefit Trust 2007 held 202,029 ordinary shares (2013: 202,029 ordinary 
shares) with a fair value of £0.6m (2013: £0.8m). 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  89
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 89

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

27. Reconciliation of shareholders’ funds 
(c) Total equity 

continued

Equity attributable to equity holders of the parent

Retained 
earnings
£m

1,383.4

24.6

–

–

10.0

(3.5)

31.1

(36.7)

–

–

(0.2)

1.2

1,378.8

1,348.8

65.6

–

–

Total 
£m

396.3

24.6

(0.5) 

7.4

10.0

(3.7) 

37.8

(36.7) 

64.9

(1.4) 

(0.2) 

1.2

461.9

369.5

65.6

(0.5) 

(7.5) 

(2.5)

70.3

(36.7)

1.0

1,383.4

(2.3) 

62.5

(36.7) 

1.0

396.3

Minority 
interests 
£m 

Total 
equity
£m

2.1 

0.4 

– 

0.3 

– 

– 

0.7 

(0.2) 

– 

– 

(1.0) 

– 

1.6 

2.5 

0.2 

– 

398.4

25.0

(0.5)

7.7

10.0

(3.7)

38.5

(36.9)

64.9

(1.4)

(1.2)

1.2

463.5

372.0

65.8

(0.5)

(0.3) 

(7.8)

– 

– 

(0.1) 

(0.3) 

– 

2.1 

7.2

(2.3)

62.4

(37.0)

1.0

398.4

–

7.2

7.2

2014 

As at 1 January 2014 

Profit for the year 

Revaluation of investments 

Exchange differences on 
translation of foreign operations 

Remeasurement of the net 
defined benefit pension scheme 
asset 

Taxation charge on components 
of other comprehensive income 

Total comprehensive income 

Dividends paid 

Issue of ordinary shares 

Share issue costs 

Decrease in minority interests 

Credit arising on share-based 
payment awards 

Total from 
Note 27(a)  
£m 

Total from 
Note 27(b)
£m

193.0 

(1,180.1)

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

64.9 

(1.4) 

– 

– 

–

(0.5)

7.4

–

(0.2)

6.7

–

–

–

–

–

As at 31 December 2014 

256.5 

(1,173.4)

2013  

As at 1 January 2013 

Profit for the year 

Revaluation of investments 

Exchange differences on 
translation of foreign operations 

Remeasurement of the net 
defined benefit pension scheme 
asset 

Taxation credit/(charge) on 
components of other 
comprehensive income 

Total comprehensive income 

Dividends paid 

Credit arising on share-based 
payment awards 

193.0 

(1,172.3)

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

–

(0.5)

(7.5)

0.2

(7.8)

–

–

As at 31 December 2013 

193.0 

(1,180.1)

90  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
90 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
28. Share-based payments
Share option awards 
As at 31 December 2014 the Group had one active equity-based long term incentive plan, the Tullett Prebon Long Term Incentive 
Plan, for the granting of non-transferable awards to certain employees and executives.  

Option awards granted under the plan typically become exercisable three years after grant date. The exercise of certain options  
is dependent on option holders meeting performance criteria. The maximum life of the options is 10 years after grant date. 
Options are settled in equity once exercised. 

Outstanding awards at 31 December 2014 and their estimated fair values when granted are set out below: 

Awards 

Long term incentive award (2009) 

The following table shows the number of share awards outstanding during 2014 and 2013: 

2014 

Outstanding at start of the year 

Exercised during the year 

Lapsed during the year 

Outstanding at end of year 

Exercisable at end of year 

2013 

Outstanding at start of the year 

Exercised during the year 

Lapsed during the year 

Outstanding at end of year 

Exercisable at end of year 

Awards 
outstanding 
2014 

Estimated 
fair 
value at 
grant date

302,148

199p

Share options 
No.

1,061,558

–

(759,410)

302,148

302,148

1,746,891

(127,832)

(557,501)

1,061,558

302,148

The weighted average exercise price for all awards is £nil (2013: £nil). 

As at 31 December 2014 the weighted average contractual life of outstanding share-based awards was 4.5 years (2013: 7.5 years). 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  91
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 91

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

28. Share-based payments 
During the year no share options were exercised (2013: 127,832). Share options under the long term incentive awards granted in 
2011 and 2012 lapsed during the year. 

continued

The estimated fair value of each option granted under the long term incentive awards granted in 2009 was calculated by applying 
a Monte Carlo simulation model. The model inputs were the share price at grant date, exercise price, expected volatility, expected 
dividends based on historical dividend payment, the expected life of the option until exercise, a risk-free interest rate based on 
government securities with a similar maturity profile and the volatility and correlation of Total Shareholder Return (‘TSR’) with a 
comparator group of companies. 

The model inputs for share option awards that existed as at 31 December 2014 are set out below: 

Share price at date of grant (p) 

Exercise price (p) 

Expected volatility 

Expected life (years) 

Risk-free rate 

Expected dividend yield 

Expected volatility of comparator group

Correlation with comparator group 

Retail Price Index 

Proportion meeting service criteria  

Note: 
(1)  Was subject to total shareholder return and return on capital conditions. 

Charge arising from share-based option awards 

Charge arising from acquisition related share-based payments (Note 29(a))

Long term 
incentive 
award(1)
(2009)

284

nil

58%

3

2.2%

4.5%

49%

27%

n/a

100%

2013
£m

1.0

–

1.0

2014 
£m 

0.3 

0.9 

1.2 

92  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
92 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
29. Acquisitions 
(a) Subsidiaries acquired during the year 
PVM Oil Associates Limited 
On 26 November 2014 the Group issued 25.8m shares with a fair value of £64.9m to acquire 100% of the share capital of PVM Oil 
Associates Limited (‘PVM’). Further deferred consideration with an estimated fair value of £5.8m, payable in shares or cash at the 
Group’s discretion, is payable in 2017. Intangible assets arising on the consolidation of PVM amounted to £61.2m of which £51.7m 
relates to goodwill. Acquisition costs of £1.8m have been included in administrative expenses and £1.4m of equity issue costs have 
been charged against the merger reserve in equity. 

This transaction has been accounted for under the acquisition method of accounting. 

Net assets acquired 

Property plant and equipment 

Trade and other receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents  

Trade and other payables 

Current tax 

Provisions 

Deferred tax 

Intangible assets arising on consolidation 

– other intangible assets 

– goodwill 

Fair value of total consideration 

Satisfied by: 

– issue of ordinary shares 

– deferred consideration 

Fair value
£m

1.0

16.2

17.5

(22.0)

(1.1)

(0.4)

(1.7)

9.5

9.5

51.7

70.7

64.9

5.8

70.7

Intangible assets arising on consolidation relate to the PVM brand, £1.5m, the value of customer relationships, £8.0m with the 
balance of £51.7m recognised as goodwill, representing the value of the established workforce and the business’s reputation. 

Goodwill arising on acquisition 

Effect of movements in exchange rates

Goodwill at 31 December 2014 

£m

51.7

0.2

51.9

The revenue, underlying operating profit and underlying earnings for the period since the date of the acquisition were £7.5m, 
£1.5m and £1.1m respectively. Had PVM been acquired on 1 January 2014 revenue would have been £68.7m higher, underlying 
operating profit £11.4m higher and underlying earnings £8.8m higher. 

As part of the acquisition of PVM, certain former shareholders are eligible to receive additional payments after three years’ service 
provided they remain as employees and PVM achieves revenue performance targets over that period. The Group has the sole right 
to issue equity or cash to satisfy these additional payments, which although deferred consideration in substance, are conditional 
on future employment, and the fair value of the payments as at the date of acquisition, which was estimated to be US$48.0m 
(£30.6m), is being recognised as a share-based expense, through the income statement and equity, over the three year service 
term. The share-based expense recognised in future periods will be adjusted to reflect actual service and revenue performance. 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  93
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 93

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

continued

29. Acquisitions 
Murphy & Durieu 
On 31 December 2014 one of the Group’s US subsidiaries hired a team of brokers which formed Murphy & Durieu L.P.’s primary 
fixed income interdealer brokering business. Consideration of US$5.6m (£3.6m) was paid in cash. Deferred consideration with a 
fair value of US$0.8m (£0.5m) is payable over a five year period subject to earnings targets. The fair value of the identifiable assets 
and liabilities acquired were negligible, resulting in the recognition of goodwill of US$6.4m (£4.1m), attributable to the highly 
skilled workforce and the business’s reputation. Given the nature of the acquisition it is impracticable to show the revenue and 
earnings for the full year as if acquired from the beginning of the year. 

(b) Analysis of deferred and contingent consideration in respect of acquisitions 
Certain acquisitions made by the Group are satisfied in part by deferred or contingent deferred consideration. The Group has 
re-estimated the amounts due where necessary, with any corresponding adjustments being made profit or loss. 

At 1 January 

Acquisitions during the year 

Unwind of discount 

Cash paid 

Credit taken to the income statement

Effect of movements in exchange rates

At 31 December 

Amounts falling due within one year 

Amounts falling due after one year 

At 31 December 

2014 
£m 

2013
£m

1.7 

6.3 

0.1 

(0.7)

(1.0)

– 

6.4 

0.1 

6.3 

6.4 

5.8

–

0.5

(2.3)

(1.8)

(0.5)

1.7

1.4

0.3

1.7

(c) Purchase of minority interest 
On 19 February 2014 Yamane Tullett Prebon (Japan) Limited (‘YTP’) became a wholly owned subsidiary when the Group acquired 
the 50% of equity not previously held. Prior to the purchase the Group was entitled to 60% of YTP’s trading results and controlled 
the entity. Consideration of £1.2m was paid in cash. The change in minority interest is reflected within equity (Note 27(c)). YTP was 
subsequently renamed Tullett Prebon (Japan) Limited. 

94  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
94 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
30. Reconciliation of operating result to net cash from operating activities 

Operating profit  

Adjustments for: 

– Share-based compensation expense

– Pension scheme’s administration costs 

– Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 

– Amortisation of intangible assets 

– Goodwill impairment 

– Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment 

– Loss on derecognition of intangible assets 

Increase/(decrease) in provisions for liabilities and charges

(Decrease)/increase in non-current liabilities 

Operating cash flows before movement in working capital

Decrease in trade and other receivables

(Increase)/decrease in net settlement balances 

Decrease in trade and other payables 

Cash generated from operations 

Income taxes paid 

Interest paid 

Net cash from operating activities 

2014 
£m 

47.6 

1.2 

0.6 

6.5 

7.1 

6.8 

– 

– 

9.7 

(1.6)

77.9 

25.9 

(1.1)

(17.3)

85.4 

(15.9)

(16.7)

52.8 

2013
£m

100.2

1.0

–

5.5

6.4

–

1.5

0.1

(5.1)

2.8

112.4

13.2

0.4

(19.6)

106.4

(27.5)

(16.8)

62.1

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  95
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 95

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

31. Analysis of net funds 

2014 

Cash 

Cash equivalents 

Client settlement money 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Financial assets 

Total funds 

Notes due within one year 

Notes due after one year 

At 
1 January 
£m

212.6

37.4

1.6

251.6

31.2

282.8

(8.5)

(219.1)

(227.6)

Cash
flow
£m

5.5

24.5

0.1

30.1

(20.6)

9.5

8.5

–

8.5

Total net funds 

55.2

18.0

2013 

Cash 

Cash equivalents 

Client settlement money 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Financial assets 

Total funds 

Bank loans due within one year 

Bank loans due after one year 

Notes due after one year 

Finance leases 

201.9

78.0

1.6

281.5

30.3

311.8

(10.0)

(18.7)

–

(227.1)

(255.8)

14.8

(39.8)

–

(25.0)

1.9

(23.1)

10.0

20.0

–

–

30.0

Non-cash 
items 
£m 

Exchange 
rate 
movements 
£m 

At 
31 December
£m

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(0.6) 

(0.6) 

(0.6) 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

(1.3) 

(8.5) 

8.0 

(1.8) 

5.2 

0.2 

– 

5.4 

0.1 

5.5 

– 

– 

– 

5.5 

(4.1)

(0.8)

– 

(4.9)

(1.0)

(5.9)

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

223.3

62.1

1.7

287.1

10.7

297.8

–

(219.7)

(219.7)

78.1

212.6

37.4

1.6

251.6

31.2

282.8

–

–

(8.5)

(219.1)

(227.6)

Total net funds 

56.0

6.9

(1.8) 

(5.9)

55.2

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash at bank and other short term highly liquid investments with an original maturity of three 
months or less. As at 31 December 2014 cash and cash equivalents amounted to £287.1m (2013: £251.6m). Cash at bank earns 
interest at floating rates based on daily bank deposit rates. Short term deposits are made for varying periods of between one day 
and three months depending on the immediate cash requirements of the Group, and earn interest at the respective short term 
deposit rates. 

Financial assets comprise short term government securities and term deposits held with banks and clearing organisations. 

96  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
96 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
32. Contingent liabilities 
In respect of legal matters or disputes for which a provision has not been made, notwithstanding the uncertainties that are 
inherent in the outcome of such matters, there are no issues which are considered to pose a significant risk of material adverse 
financial impact on the Group’s results or net assets.  

In the normal course of business, certain Group companies enter into guarantees and indemnities to cover trading arrangements 
and/or the use of third party services or software. 

33. Operating lease commitments 

Minimum operating lease payments recognised in the income statement

2014 
£m 

16.7 

At 31 December 2014 the Group had outstanding commitments for future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable 
operating leases, which fall due as follows: 

Within one year 

Within two to five years 

Over five years 

2014

2013

Buildings
£m

Other 
£m 

Buildings 
£m 

14.1

41.3

44.5

99.9

1.1 

0.5 

– 

1.6 

12.6 

36.3 

53.3 

102.2 

2013
£m

14.7

Other
£m

1.2

0.6

–

1.8

34. Retirement benefits 
(a) Defined benefit schemes 
The Group operates one defined benefit pension scheme in the UK, the defined benefit section of the Tullett Prebon Pension 
Scheme (‘the Scheme’). In addition, there are a small number of schemes operated in other countries which collectively are not 
significant in the context of the Group. 

The Scheme is a final salary, funded pension scheme that is closed to new members and future accrual. For members still in service 
there is a continuing link between benefits and pensionable pay. The Principal Employer is Tullett Prebon Group Limited. 

The assets of the Scheme are held separately from those of the Group, either in separate trustee administered funds or in contract-
based policies of insurance. 

The latest funding actuarial valuations of the Scheme was carried out as at 30 April 2013 by independent qualified actuaries. 

The amounts included in the balance sheet arising from the Group’s obligations in respect of the Scheme are as follows: 

Fair value of Scheme assets  

Present value of Scheme liabilities 

Defined benefit pension Scheme surplus 

Deferred tax liability (Note 19) 

2014 
£m 

255.7 

(193.6)

62.1 

2013
£m

226.1

(175.6)

50.5

(21.7)

(17.7)

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  97
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 97

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

34. Retirement benefits 
(a) Defined benefit schemes continued 
The main financial assumptions used by the independent qualified actuaries of the Scheme to calculate the liabilities under 
IAS 19 were: 

continued

Key assumptions 

Discount rate 

Expected rate of salary increases 
Rate of increase in LPI pensions in payment(1) 

Inflation assumption 

2014 
% 

3.70 

4.55 

2.20 

2.20 

2013
%

4.40

4.95

2.60

2.70

Note: 
(1)  This applies to pensions accrued from 6 April 1997. The majority of current and future pensions receive fixed increases in payment of either 0% or 2.5%. 

The mortality assumptions are based on standard mortality tables and allow for future mortality improvements and are the same 
as those adopted for the 2013 funding valuation. Assumptions for the Scheme are that a member who retires in 15 years’ time at 
age 60 will live on average for a further 31.2 years (2013: 31.1 years) after retirement if they are male and for a further 32.6 years 
(2013: 32.5 years) after retirement if they are female. Current pensioners are assumed to have a generally shorter life expectancy 
based on their current age. 

The valuation of the Scheme liabilities is sensitive to changes in the assumptions used. The effect of changes in the discount rate, 
inflation and mortality assumptions, assuming an independent change in one assumption with all others held constant, on the 
liabilities is shown below: 

As at 31 December 2014 

Following a 0.25% decrease in the discount rate 

Following a 0.25% increase in the inflation assumption 

Life expectancy increases by 3 years 

Scheme assets
£m

255.7

0%

255.7

0%

255.7

0%

255.7

Change

New value

Change

New value

Change

New value

Scheme 
liabilities 
£m 

(193.6)

(4.6%)

(202.5) 

(2.3%)

(198.0) 

(6.6%)

(206.4) 

Surplus/(deficit) 
£m

62.1

(14.3%)

53.2

(7.1%)

57.7

(20.6%)

49.3

Note: 
The above analysis does not reflect any inter-relationship between the assumptions. 

Changes to the risks inherent in the Scheme would result in changes to the Scheme’s carrying value. The most significant risks are: 
investment performance – the liabilities are calculated using a discount rate set by reference to bond yields. If assets underperform 
this yield, this would result in the carrying value of the Scheme reducing; changes in bond yields – a decrease in corporate bond 
yields will increase the value placed on the Scheme’s liabilities; inflation risk – some of the Scheme’s liabilities are linked to 
inflation, and higher inflation would lead to higher liabilities (mitigated by a cap on the level of inflationary increases which 
protects against extreme inflationary increases); and life expectancy – the majority of the Scheme’s obligations are for the life of 
the member, so increases in life expectancy will result in an increase in the liabilities. 

98  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
98 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
The amounts recognised in the income statement in respect of the Scheme were as follows: 

Deemed interest arising on the defined benefit pension scheme surplus

2014 
£m 

2.2 

2013
£m

1.9

Deemed interest arising on the defined benefit pension scheme surplus has been included within finance income (Note 8).  
Scheme expenses for the year of £0.6m (2013: £0.6m) have been included in administrative expenses. 

The amounts recognised in other comprehensive income in respect of the Scheme were as follows: 

Return on Scheme assets (excluding deemed interest income) – Trustee administered funds

Return on Scheme assets (excluding deemed interest income) – revaluation of insurance policies

Actuarial (losses)/gains arising on the revaluation of insurance policies

Actuarial losses arising from changes in financial assumptions

Actuarial losses arising from changes in demographic assumptions

Actuarial gains/(losses) arising from experience adjustments

Remeasurement of the defined benefit pension scheme 

Movements in the present value of the Scheme liabilities were as follows: 

At 1 January 

Deemed interest cost 

Actuarial (losses)/gains on the revaluation of insurance policies

Actuarial losses arising from changes in financial assumptions

Actuarial losses arising from changes in demographic assumptions

Actuarial gains/(losses) arising from experience adjustments

Benefits paid/transfers out 

At 31 December 

Movements in the fair value of the Scheme assets were as follows: 

At 1 January 

Deemed interest income 

Return on Scheme assets (excluding deemed interest income) – Trustee administered funds

Return on Scheme assets (excluding deemed interest income) – revaluation of insurance policies

Employer contributions 

Benefits paid/transfers out 

Administrative expense 

At 31 December 

2014 
£m 

25.2 

0.4 

(0.4)

(16.8)

– 

1.6 

10.0 

2014 
£m 

(175.6)

(7.6)

(0.4)

(16.8)

– 

1.6 

5.2 

2013
£m

24.6

(6.8)

6.8

(4.5)

(6.6)

(6.3)

7.2

2013
£m

(162.9)

(7.1)

6.8

(4.5)

(6.6)

(6.3)

5.0

(193.6)

(175.6)

2014 
£m 

226.1 

9.8 

25.2 

0.4 

– 

(5.2)

(0.6)

2013
£m

204.3

9.0

24.6

(6.8)

0.6

(5.0)

(0.6)

255.7 

226.1

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  99
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 99

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

34. Retirement benefits 
(a) Defined benefit schemes continued 
The major categories and fair values of the Scheme assets as at 31 December were as follows: 

continued

Cash and cash equivalents 

Equity instruments 

– Consumer products 

– Industrials 

– Business services 

Insurance policies 

Other receivables 

At 31 December 

2014 
£m 

6.4 

197.4 

20.0 

26.6 

244.0 

4.5 

0.8 

2013
£m

3.8

178.5

18.4

20.5

217.4

4.2

0.7

255.7 

226.1

All equity instruments have quoted prices in active markets. The Scheme does not hedge against foreign currency exposures 
or interest rate risk. 

The Scheme duration is an indicator of the weighted average time until benefit payments are made. For the Scheme as a whole, 
the duration is around 20 years reflecting the approximate split of the defined benefit liability between current employees 
(duration of 25 years), deferred members (duration of 23 years) and current pensioners (duration of 13 years). 

The estimated amounts of contributions expected to be paid into the Schemes during 2015 is £nil. 

(b) Defined contribution pensions 
The Group operates a number of defined contribution schemes for qualifying employees. The assets of these schemes are held 
separately from those of the Group. 

The defined contribution pension cost for the Group charged to administrative expenses was £6.9m (2013: £7.0m), of which £2.0m 
(2013: £2.2m) related to overseas schemes. 

As at 31 December 2014, there was £0.6m outstanding in respect of the current reporting period that had not been paid over 
to the schemes (2013: £0.6m). 

100  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
100 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
35. Client money 
Client money held was £1.7m (2013: £1.6m). This represents balances held by the Group received as a result of corporate actions 
relating to securities transactions. 

36. Related party transactions 
Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties, have been eliminated on consolidation  
and are not disclosed in this Note. 

The total amounts owed to and from related parties and associates at 31 December 2014 are set out below: 

Associates 

Related parties 

Amounts owed by  
related parties

Amounts owed  
to related parties

2014
£m

0.5

–

2013 
£m 

0.4 

– 

2014 
£m 

– 

– 

2013
£m

–

–

The amounts outstanding are unsecured and will be settled in cash. No guarantees have been given or received. No provisions have 
been made for doubtful debts in respect of the amounts owed by related parties. 

Directors 
Costs in respect of the Directors who were the key management personnel of the Group during the year are set out below in 
aggregate for each of the categories specified in IAS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures’. Further information about the individual 
directors is provided in the audited part of the Report on Directors’ Remuneration on pages 35 to 48. 

Short term benefits 

Share-based payment expense 

Social security costs 

2014 
£m 

2.5 

0.4 

0.3 

3.2 

2013
£m

4.1

1.0

0.6

5.7

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  101
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 101

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated  
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements continued
Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

37. Principal subsidiaries and undertakings
At 31 December 2014, the following companies were the Group’s principal trading subsidiary undertakings, principal intermediate 
holding companies and associates. 

Principal  
activities 

Issued ordinary 
shares, all voting 

Subsidiary undertakings 

Tullett Prebon (Australia) Pty. Limited 
Marshalls (Bahrain) WLL(1)

Tullett Liberty (Bahrain) Company W.L.L.

PVM Oil Associates Limited 

Tullett Prebon Holdings do Brasil Ltda.

Tullett Prebon Brasil S.A. Corretora de Valores e Câmbio 

Tullett Prebon Canada Limited 

Tullett Prebon Group Holdings plc  

TP Holdings Limited 

Tullett Prebon Group Limited  

Tullett Prebon Investment Holdings Limited 

Tullett Prebon (Europe) Limited  

Tullett Prebon (Securities) Limited 

Tullett Prebon (Equities) Limited 

PVM Oil Futures Limited 

Tullett Prebon Information Limited  

Tullett Prebon (Hong Kong) Limited  

PT. Inti Tullett Prebon Indonesia  

Tullett Prebon FXO (Japan) Limited (formerly Tullett 
Prebon (Japan) Limited)  

Tullett Prebon (Japan) Limited (formerly Yamane Tullett 
Prebon (Japan) Limited) 

Tullett Prebon Money Brokerage (Korea) Limited 

Tullett Prebon México SA de CV 

Tullett Prebon (Philippines) Inc.  

Tullett Prebon (Polska) SA 

Tullett Prebon Energy (Singapore) Pte. Ltd.  

Tullett Prebon (Singapore) Limited  

Country of 
incorporation 
and operation

Australia

Bahrain

Bahrain

Bermuda. 
Operating in England

Brazil

Brazil

Canada

England

England

England

England

England

England

England

England

Broking

Broking

Broking

Broking

Holding company

Broking

Broking 

Holding company 

Holding company 

Service company

Holding company

Broking

Broking

Broking

Broking

Guernsey. 
Operating in England

Information sales 

Hong Kong

Indonesia

Japan

Japan

Korea

Mexico

Philippines

Poland

Singapore

Singapore

Broking

Broking

Broking

Broking

Broking

Broking

Broking

Broking

Broking

Broking

Prebon Technology Services (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. 

Singapore

IT support services 

PVM Oil Associates Pte Ltd 

PVM Oil Futures Pte Ltd 

Tullett Prebon South Africa (Pty) Limited 

Cosmorex A.G. 

Tullett Prebon (Dubai) Limited 

Singapore

Singapore

South Africa

Switzerland

UAE

Broking

Broking

Broking

Broking

Broking

102  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
102 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

100%

70%

85%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100% 

100%

57.52%

100%

100%

100%

100%

51%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

 
 
 
Subsidiary undertakings 

Tullett Prebon (Americas) Holdings Inc.

Tullett Prebon Americas Corp 

Tullett Prebon Financial Services LLC  

tpSEF Inc. 

PVM Oil Associates Inc. 

PVM Oil Futures Inc. 

Tullett Prebon Information Inc. 

Note: 
(1)  The Group’s interest in the trading results is 90%. 

Country of 
incorporation 
and operation

Principal  
activities 

Issued ordinary 
shares, all voting 

USA

USA

USA

USA

USA

USA

USA

Holding company 

Holding company

Broking

Broking

Broking

Broking

Information sales 

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

All the above subsidiary undertakings are owned indirectly, with the exception of Tullett Prebon Group Holdings plc and PVM Oil 
Associates Limited, which are owned directly. They all have a 31 December year end with the exception of Tullett Prebon (Japan) 
Limited (formerly Yamane Tullett Prebon (Japan) Limited), which has a 31 March year end. 

As at 31 December 2014, £1.6m (2013: £2.1m) is due to minority interests relating to those subsidiaries that are not wholly owned. 
Movement in minority interests is set out in Note 27(c). No individual minority interest is material to the Group. There are no 
significant restrictions on the ability of the Group to access or use assets and settle liabilities relating to these subsidiaries. 

Associates 

Tullett Prebon SITICO (China) Limited 

Parekh (Forex) Private Limited  

Prebon Yamane (India) Limited 

Wall Street Tullett Prebon Limited  

Wall Street Tullett Prebon Securities Limited  

Country of 
incorporation and 
operation

Principal  
activities 

Issued ordinary 
shares, all voting 

China

India 

India

Thailand

Thailand

Broking

Broking

Broking

Broking

Broking

33%

26%

48%

49%

49%

All associates are held indirectly. They all have a 31 December year end with the exception of Parekh (Forex) Private Limited,  
which has a 31 March year end. 

A full list of subsidiary undertakings and associates will be annexed to the next annual return of Tullett Prebon plc to be filed with 
the Registrar of Companies. 

38. Events after the balance sheet date

The action taken by the Company and certain of its subsidiaries against BGC in the New Jersey Superior Court, alleging claims for 
racketeering, unfair competition, misappropriation of confidential information and trade secrets, and tortious interference, was 
concluded in January 2015. 

The Company entered into an agreement with BGC on 13 January 2015 under which BGC will pay $100m (£66m) to the Company 
to settle the litigation in the New Jersey Superior Court. The settlement agreement also settles all other outstanding litigation 
between the parties, which will now be dismissed. 

The first $25m of the $100m settlement was paid to the Company in January 2015, and the balance of $75m will be paid to the 
Company before the end of March 2015. The income will be taxed in the UK at the standard rate of corporation tax applicable 
in 2015. 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  103
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 103

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
Company Balance Sheet
Company Balance sheet

as at 31 December 2014
as at 31 December 2014 

Fixed assets 

Investment in subsidiary undertakings 

Current assets 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Prepayments and accrued income 

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year 

Net current assets 

Total assets less current liabilities  

Creditors: amounts falling due after one year 

Net assets 

Capital and reserves 

Called-up share capital 

Share premium 

Merger reserve 

Own shares 

Profit and loss account 

Shareholders’ funds 

Notes 

2014
£m

2013
£m

4 

1,040.8 

957.6 

30.9 

0.7 

31.6 

(5.4)

26.2

1,067.0

(84.9)

982.1

60.9

17.1

57.0

(0.1)

847.2

982.1

5 

5 

6 

7 

7 

7 

7 

14.8 

1.3 

16.1 

(12.3)

3.8

961.4

(78.9)

882.5

54.4

17.1

–

(0.1)

811.1

882.5

The Financial Statements of Tullett Prebon plc (registered number 5807599) were approved by the Board of Directors and 
authorised for issue on 3 March 2015 and are signed on its behalf by

John Phizackerley 
Chief Executive 

104  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
104 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements
 Notes to the Financial Statements 

for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

1. Basis of preparation 
(a) Basis of accounting 
The separate Financial Statements of the Company are presented as required by the Companies Act. They have been prepared 
under the historical cost convention and in accordance with applicable United Kingdom law and United Kingdom Generally 
Accepted Accounting Practice. As discussed on page 26 of the Directors’ Report, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that 
the Company has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the foreseeable future. Accordingly, the going 
concern basis continues to be used in preparing these Financial Statements. 

(b) Cash flow statement 
The results, assets and liabilities of the Company are included in the Consolidated Financial Statements of Tullett Prebon plc. 
Consequently, the Company has taken advantage of the exemption available from preparing a cash flow statement under the 
terms of FRS 1 (revised) ‘Cash Flow Statements’. 

(c) Financial instruments 
As disclosures equivalent to that required under FRS 29 ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosures’ are given in the publicly available 
Consolidated Financial Statements of Tullett Prebon plc, the Company is exempt from the disclosures required by FRS 29 in its 
own accounts. 

2. Significant accounting policies 
The principal accounting policies are summarised below. They have all been applied consistently throughout the year. 

(a) Investments 
Fixed asset investments in subsidiary undertakings are shown at cost less provision for impairment. 

At acquisition, the cost of investment in a subsidiary is measured at the fair value of the consideration payable, except for 
subsidiaries acquired through the issue of shares qualifying for merger relief where cost is measured by reference to the nominal 
value of the shares issued.  

(b) Taxation 
Current taxation is provided at amounts expected to be paid (or recovered) using the tax rates and laws that have been enacted 
or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date. 

Deferred taxation is recognised in respect of all timing differences that have originated but not reversed at the balance sheet date 
where transactions or events that result in an obligation to pay more tax in the future, or a right to pay less tax in the future, have 
occurred at the balance sheet date. Timing differences are differences between the Company’s taxable profits and its results as 
stated in the Financial Statements that arise from the inclusion of gains and losses in tax assessments in periods different from 
those in which they are recognised in the Financial Statements. 

Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is regarded as more likely than not they will be recovered. Deferred tax 
assets and liabilities are not discounted. 

(c) Share-based payments 
The Company has applied the requirements of FRS 20 (IFRS 2) ‘Share-based Payment’ and UITF Abstract 44 (IFRIC Interpretation 11) 
‘FRS 20 (IFRS 2) – Group and Treasury Share Transactions’. 

The Company has share-based payment arrangements involving employees of its subsidiaries. The cost of these arrangements  
is measured by reference to the fair value of equity instruments on the date they are granted. Cost is recognised in ‘investment  
in subsidiary undertakings’ and credited to the ‘profit and loss account’ reserves on a straight-line basis over the vesting period. 
Where the cost is subsequently recharged to the subsidiary, it is recognised as a reduction in ‘investment in subsidiary 
undertakings’.  

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  105
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 105

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
Notes to the Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

2. Significant accounting policies 
(d) Financial assets and financial liabilities 
The Company has adopted FRS 25 ‘Financial Instruments: Presentation’ and FRS 26 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition 
and Measurement’.  

continued

Financial assets are classified on initial recognition as ‘loans and receivables’. Financial liabilities are classified on initial 
recognition as ‘other financial liabilities’. 

Loans and receivables 
Loans and receivables are non-derivative financial instruments that have fixed or determinable payments that are not listed in  
an active market. Loans and receivables are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less any impairment. 
Interest income is recognised using the effective interest rate, except for short term receivables when the recognition of interest 
would be immaterial. 

Other financial liabilities  
Other financial liabilities, including borrowings, are initially measured at fair value, net of transaction costs, and are subsequently 
measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, with interest expense recognised on an effective yield basis. 

Financial assets are assessed for indicators of impairment at each balance sheet date. Financial assets are impaired where there is 
objective evidence that, as a result of one or more events that occurred after the initial recognition of the financial asset, the 
estimated future cash flows of the investment have been impacted. Impairment is recognised in the income statement. 

(e) Employee Share Ownership Plans 
The assets, liabilities and results of the Tullett Prebon plc Employee Benefit Trust 2007 are included in accordance with UITF 
Abstract 38 ‘Accounting for ESOP trusts’. 

3. Profit for the year 
As permitted in section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 the Company has elected not to present its own profit and loss account  
for the year. Tullett Prebon plc reported a profit for the financial year ended 31 December 2014 of £71.6m (2013: profit £59.4m). 

The auditor’s remuneration for audit services to the Company was £0.4m (2013: £0.4m). 

4. Investments in subsidiary undertakings 

Cost 

At 1 January 

Capital contribution arising on share-based awards 

Increase in investment in subsidiary undertaking 

Acquisition of subsidiary 

At 31 December 

2014 
£m 

957.6 

1.2 

11.3 

70.7 

1,040.8 

2013
£m

905.7

1.0

50.9

–

957.6

PVM Oil Associates Limited 
On 26 November 2014 the Company issued 25.8m shares with a fair value of £64.9m to acquire 100% of the share capital of PVM 
Oil Associates Limited (‘PVM’). Further deferred consideration with an estimated fair value of £5.8m, payable in shares or cash at 
the Company’s discretion, is payable in 2017. Acquisition costs of £1.8m have been included in administrative expenses and £1.4m 
of equity issue costs have been charged against merger reserve. 

106  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
106 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
5. Creditors 

Amounts falling due within one year

Accruals and deferred income 

Amounts due to Group undertakings 

Amounts falling due after one year 

Sterling Notes June 2019 

Deferred consideration 

2014 
£m 

2.6 

2.8 

5.4 

79.1 

5.8 

84.9 

2013
£m

1.2

11.1

12.3

78.9

–

78.9

Sterling Notes: Due June 2019 
In 2012 the Company issued Sterling Notes, amounting to £80,000,000, under its Euro Medium Term Note Programme. The notes 
have a coupon of 5.25% and are due in June 2019. The notes are guaranteed by a fellow Group undertaking, TP Holdings Limited, 
for the period that the Group’s Sterling Notes due July 2016 remain outstanding. 

At 31 December 2014, the carrying value of Sterling Notes due 2019, together with unamortised transaction costs, amounted 
to £79.1m and their fair value was £82.4m (2013: £82.3m). 

6. Called-up share capital 

Allotted, issued and fully paid 

Ordinary shares of 25p 

Allotted, issued and fully paid 

Ordinary shares of 25p 

2014 
No. 

2013
No.

243,516,227 

217,739,704

2014 
£m 

2013
£m

60.9 

54.4

25,776,523 ordinary shares were issued on 26 November 2014 with a fair value of £64.9m in connection with the acquisition of 
PVM Oil Associates Limited. 

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  107
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014 | 107

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Financial Statements continued
Notes to the Financial Statements continued 
for the year ended 31 December 2014
for the year ended 31 December 2014 

7. Reconciliation of shareholders’ funds 

Called-up 
share capital
£m

Share 
premium 
account
£m

Merger 
reserve
£m

Own shares 
£m 

Profit and 
loss account 
£m 

Total 
shareholders’ 
funds
£m

2014 

Balance at 1 January 2014 

54.4

17.1

Profit for the year 

Dividends paid 

Credit arising on share-based awards 

Issue of ordinary shares 

Share issue costs 

Balance at 31 December 2014 

2013 

–

–

–

6.5

–

60.9

–

–

–

–

–

17.1

Balance at 1 January 2013 

54.4

17.1

Profit for the year 

Dividends paid 

Credit arising on share-based awards 

–

–

–

–

–

–

Balance at 31 December 2013 

54.4

17.1

–

–

–

–

58.4

(1.4)

57.0

–

–

–

–

–

(0.1) 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

811.1 

71.6 

(36.7)

1.2 

– 

– 

(0.1) 

847.2 

(0.1) 

– 

– 

– 

(0.1) 

787.4 

59.4 

(36.7)

1.0 

811.1 

882.5

71.6

(36.7)

1.2

64.9

(1.4)

982.1

858.8

59.4

(36.7)

1.0

882.5

At 31 December 2014 the Company’s distributable reserves amounted to £847.2m (2013: £811.1m).  

Merger reserve 
On 26 November 2014 the Company issued 25,776,523 ordinary shares with a fair value of £64.9m to acquire the issued share 
capital of PVM Oil Associates Limited. The £58.4m difference between the nominal value of the shares issued and their fair value 
has been credited to the merger reserve. The costs associated with this share issue have been charged against the reserve. 

Own shares 
As at 31 December 2014, the Tullett Prebon plc Employee Benefit Trust 2007 held 202,029 ordinary shares (2013: 202,029 ordinary 
shares) with a fair value of £0.6m (2013: £0.8m). 

8. Events after the balance sheet date  

The action taken by the Company and certain of its subsidiaries against BGC in the New Jersey Superior Court, alleging claims for 
racketeering, unfair competition, misappropriation of confidential information and trade secrets, and tortious interference, was 
concluded in January 2015. 

The Company entered into an agreement with BGC on 13 January 2015 under which BGC will pay $100m (£66m) to the Company 
to settle the litigation in the New Jersey Superior Court. The settlement agreement also settles all other outstanding litigation 
between the parties, which will now be dismissed. 

The first $25m of the $100m settlement was paid to the Company in January 2015, and the balance of $75m will be paid to the 
Company before the end of March 2015. The income will be taxed in the UK at the standard rate of corporation tax applicable 
in 2015. 

108  |  Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014
108 | Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
T

u

l

l

e

t

t

P

r

e

b

o

n

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

1

4

Tullett Prebon plc 
Tower 42 Level 37  
25 Old Broad Street  
London EC2N 1HQ  
United Kingdom 
www.tullettprebon.com

 
 
 
 
 
Shareholder Information

Financial calendar for 2015 
23 April
Ex-dividend Date

24 April
Dividend Record Date

6 May (2.00pm)
Annual General Meeting

14 May
Dividend payment date

Dividend mandate
Shareholders who wish their dividends to be paid directly into a bank or building society account should contact Capita Asset 
Services for a dividend mandate form. This method of payment removes the risk of delay or loss of dividend cheques in the post 
and ensures that shareholders’ accounts are credited on the dividend payment date.

Shareholder information on the internet
The Company maintains an investor relations page on its website (www.tullettprebon.com) which allows access to share price 
information, Directors’ biographies, copies of Company reports, selected press releases and other useful investor information.

Registered office
Tullett Prebon plc  
Tower 42, Level 37  
25 Old Broad Street  
London EC2N 1HQ  
United Kingdom 
Tel: +44 (0)20 7200 7000 
Website: www.tullettprebon.com

Registrar
Capita Asset Services  
The Registry 
34 Beckenham Road  
Beckenham 
Kent BR3 4TU 
Tel: 0871 664 0300* 
From overseas: +44 (0)20 8639 3399

* Calls cost 10p per minute plus network extras.

To access and maintain your shareholding online: www.capitashareportal.com

Auditor
Deloitte LLP 
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditor  
Hill House 
1 Little New Street  
London EC4A 3TR  
United Kingdom  
www.deloitte.com

Tullett Prebon plc is a company incorporated and registered in England and Wales with number 5807599

This report has been printed on paper which supports the FSC (Forest Stewardship Council) chain of custody 
environmental sustainment programme. The material used throughout the report is biodegradable, fully 
recyclable and elemental chlorine free. Both the paper mill and printer involved in the production support the 
growth of responsible forest management and are both accredited to ISO 14001 which specifies a process for 
continuous environmental improvement. Vegetable based inks were used throughout the production process.

Designed and produced by Luminous 
www.luminous.co.uk

Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  109
Tullett Prebon plc Annual Report 2014  |  109

Strategic ReportGovernanceFinancial StatementsShareholder Information